Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Anritsu Metal Detector Parte 2
Anritsu Metal Detector Parte 2
Checkweigher
SSV Series
B Type
with Metal Detector
15th Edition
* Actual products may differ from photographs / pictures / illustrations in this manual.
* Content current as of April 2021.
* All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced without the prior written permission of
ANRITSU CORPORATION.
* The operational instructions of this manual may be changed without prior notice.
For safety and warning information, please read this manual before attempting to use the equipment.
Keep this manual with the equipment.
Models Covered by This Manual
This manual is for use with the following models. Please check the model number printed on
the nameplate.
Product Models
SSV-h Series SSV-i Series SSV-f Series
KWS6003BF3D/5D/6D, KWS6265BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5203BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6003BP3D/5D/6D, KWS6265BW2E/3E/4E, KWS5203BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6003BF2E/3E/4E, KWS6366BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5203BF2E/3E/4E,
KWS6003BP2E/3E/4E, KWS6366BW2E/3E/5E, KWS5203BP2E/3E/4E,
KWS6005BF3D/5D/6D, KWS6472BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5205BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6005BP3D/5D/6D, KWS6472BW2E/3E/5E, KWS5205BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6005BF2E/3E/4E, KWS5265BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5205BF2E/3E/4E,
KWS6005BP2E/3E/4E, KWS5265BW2E/3E/4E, KWS5205BP2E/3E/4E,
KWS6006BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5366BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5206BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6006BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5366BW2E/3E/5E, KWS5206BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6006BF2E/3E/4E, KWS5472BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5206BF2E/3E/4E,
KWS6006BP2E/3E/4E, KWS5472BW2E/3E/5E, KWS5206BP2E/3E/4E,
KWS6203BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5476BW4D/5D/6D, KWS5411BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6203BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5476BW2E/4E/5E, KWS5411BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6203BF2E/3E/4E, KWS5577BW4D/5D/6D, KWS5411BF2E/3E/5E,
KWS6203BP2E/3E/4E, KWS5577BW2E/4E/5E KWS5411BP2E/3E/5E,
KWS6205BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5412BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6205BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5412BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6205BF2E/3E/4E, KWS5412BF2E/3E/5E,
KWS6205BP2E/3E/4E, KWS5412BP2E/3E/5E,
KWS6206BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5414BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6206BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5414BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6206BF2E/3E/4E, KWS5414BF2E/3E/5E,
KWS6206BP2E/3E/4E, KWS5414BP2E/3E/5E,
KWS6411BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5416BF4D/5D/6D,
KWS6411BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5416BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6411BF2E/3E/5E, KWS5416BF2E/4E/5E,
KWS6411BP2E/3E/5E, KWS5416BP2E/4E/5E,
KWS6412BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5417BF4D/5D/6D,
KWS6412BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5417BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6412BF2E/3E/5E, KWS5417BF2E/4E/5E,
KWS6412BP2E/3E/5E, KWS5417BP2E/4E/5E,
KWS6414BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5522BF4D/5D/6D,
KWS6414BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5522BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6414BF2E/3E/5E, KWS5522BF2E/4E/5E,
KWS6414BP2E/3E/5E, KWS5522BP2E/4E/5E,
KWS6416BF4D/5D/6D, KWS5524BF4D/5D/6D,
KWS6416BP4D/5D/6D, KWS5524BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6416BF2E/4E/5E, KWS5524BF2E/4E/5E,
KWS6416BP2E/4E/5E, KWS5524BP2E/4E/5E
KWS6417BF4D/5D/6D,
KWS6417BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6417BF2E/4E/5E,
KWS6417BP2E/4E/5E
* The suffixes D and E indicate the type of metal detector. D indicates the SSV series with duw type metal
detector, while E indicates SSV series with duw-h type metal detector.
2
Product Models
SSV-h Series SSV-i Series SSV-f Series
KWS6003BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6005BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6366BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5205BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6006BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6472BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5206BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5411BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6205BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5366BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5412BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6206BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5472BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5414BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6411BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5476BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6412BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5577BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5417BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6414BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6265BW2G/3G/4G, KWS5522BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6265BW3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5524BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6417BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6003BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6366BW3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6005BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6472BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5206BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6006BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6472BW3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5411BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5265BW2G/3G/4G, KWS5412BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5265BW3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5414BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6206BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5416BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6411BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5366BW3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5417BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6412BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5472BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5522BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6414BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5472BW3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5524BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6416BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5476BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, KWS5203BF2G/3G/4G,
KWS6417BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5577BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, KWS5205BF2G/3G/4G,
KWS6003BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5577BW4K/6K/7K/8K KWS5205BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6005BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5206BF2G/3G/4G,
KWS6006BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5206BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6203BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6205BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5411BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6205BF3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5412BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6206BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5412BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6206BF3K/4K/5K/7K8K, KWS5414BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5414BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6411BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6412BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5417BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6412BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5522BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6414BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5524BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6414BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5524BF4K/6K/7K/8K,
KWS6416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, KWS5203BP2G/3G/4G,
KWS6417BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, KWS5205BP2G/3G/4G,
KWS6003BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5205BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6005BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5206BP2G/3G/4G,
KWS6006BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5206BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6203BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6205BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5411BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6205BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5412BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6206BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5412BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6206BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5414BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5414BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6411BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
* The R, G and K at the end indicates the type of metal detector. R is the M5 series with a metal detector, G
is the M6-h series with a metal detector, K is the M6-h vertical series with a metal detector.
3
Product Models
SSV-h Series SSV-i Series SSV-f Series
KWS6412BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5417BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6412BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5522BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6414BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5524BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6414BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, KWS5524BP4K/6K/7K/8K
KWS6416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6417BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G
* The R, G and K at the end indicates the type of metal detector. R is the M5 series with a metal detector,G
is the M6-h series with a metal detector, K is the M6-h vertical series with a metal detector.
4
Introduction
Read the operation manual thoroughly before using the product. Keep the operation manual with the product for
easy reference.
・ Installation
Manager and equipment
Operation Manual (this document) ・ Details on how to operate
maintenance personnel
・ Maintenance
Indicates the items for KWSXXXXBXXD(SSV series with duw type metal detector).
Indicates the items for KWSXXXXBXXE (SSV series with duw-h type metal detector).
Flat-bladed screwdriver
5
Contents
■ Models Covered by This Manual ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 2 ● Timing Adjustment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 97
1 Basic Operations
■ Safety Symbolsꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 8 (Readjusting registered products) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 99
■ SSV Series Checkweighers ■ Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 102
with Metal Detector ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 9 ● Saving Data to the USB Memory ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ102
■ Checking the Package Contents ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 10 ● Setting External I/O Signals ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ123
2 Advanced Operations
■ Turning on the System for the First Time ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 29 ● Adjusting Touch Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ156
● Investigating the cause of incorrect detections ● Specifying the installation check settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ173
■ Viewing Measurement Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 88 ■ Options and Peripheral Devices ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 184
6
● Viewing History ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 220 ● Installing the Conveyor Belt/Roller ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ287
● Setting Access Level By Function ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 223 ● Adjusting Belt Alignment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ289
● Correcting the Phase based on Characteristic ● Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ292
Change (product check function) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 230 ● Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unitꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ294
● Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 233 ● Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ295
● Chronologically Viewing the Effect Value of the ● Removing the Conveyor Belt ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ297
Product (Product effect monitor) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 242 ● Installing the Conveyor Belt ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ298
● Checking the Effects such as External Noise ● Adjusting Belt Alignment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ299
(Noise monitor) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 246
■ Check Items for Failureꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 300
● Using HIS Setting Function
● Troubleshooting ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ300
ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 249
● Outputting support data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 311
● Using Auto-Limit-Setting Function ꞏꞏꞏ 254
● Forced Operation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ313
● Using FOCUS Setting Function ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 257
■ Error Messages and Solutions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 316
■ Adjusting Photocell ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 348
3 Installation and Connection ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 262
■ Selecting Installation Location and
5 Appendix ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 352
Transportation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 263
■ Consumables ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 353
■ Installation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 264
■ Spare Parts ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 364
■ Connecting External Equipment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 266
■ Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and
● SSV-h/f Series ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 267
Push-Type Terminal Block ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 384
● SSV-i Series ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 268
■ External I/O Specifications ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 385
■ Connecting Power Supply and Grounding,
■ RJ Output Specification ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 389
Turning On the Power ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 269
■ RJ-I/F Unit (Optional)
RJ I/O Specifications ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 390
4 Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 270
■ Ethernet Connection ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 393
■ Daily Maintenanceꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 271
■ Timing Chart ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 395
● Daily Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 271
■ Specifications ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 396
● Weekly Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 272
■ Copyright, etc. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 606
■ Cleaning ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 273
■ CE Conformity Markingꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 607
● SSV-h/f Series ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 273
■ Installing/Removing Components
(SSV-h/f series) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 278
● Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unit ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 278
7
Safety Symbols
To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction, ANRITSU CORPORATION (Anritsu)
uses the following safety symbols to indicate safety-related information. Insure that you clearly understand the
meanings of the symbols BEFORE using the equipment. Some or all of the symbols may not be used on this
equipment. In addition, when drawings are included in this manual, labels on the equipment may not be shown on
them.
This indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in death or serious
DANGER injury if not performed properly.
This indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in death or serious injury
WARNING if not performed properly.
The following safety symbols are used inside or on the equipment near operation locations, and/or in manual to
provide information about safety items and operation precautions. Insure that you clearly understand the meanings
of the symbols and take the necessary precautions BEFORE using the equipment.
This indicates a warning or caution. The contents are indicated in or near the
triangle.
8
SSV Series Checkweighers with Metal Detector
9
Checking the Package Contents
Make sure that all of the following items are present. If any item is damaged or missing, please contact us.
● SSV-h/f Series
□ Main unit 1 □ Spanner 1
(Double-head wrench with bolt widths 10 mm and 7 mm)
● SSV-i Series
□ Main unit 1 □ Spanner 1
(Double-head wrench with bolt widths 10 mm and 7 mm)
10
Names and Functions
● Main unit
● Indicator
● Conveyor section
11
Names and Functions
■ Weigh conveyor section, Infeed conveyor section
SSV-h/f Series
Weigh conveyor section [Weigh conveyor section]
(KWS6XXX, KWS52XX, KWS54XX type) [1], [5] Weigh conveyor unit
[1] [2], [7] Motor
[3],[6] Belt cover
[4] Catch clip
[6]
[3] [7] [8]
[5]
[4]
Infeed conveyor unit
(Common to SSV-h/f series)
[9]
[10]
[12]
[11]
12
Names and Functions
SSV-i Series
Weigh conveyor section [Weigh conveyor section]
[1] Weigh conveyor unit
[1] [2] Motor
[3], [4] Catch clip
[6]
[7]
[8]
Infeed conveyor section [Infeed conveyor section]
[1] Infeed conveyor section
[2]
[3]
13
Names and Functions
● Operation screen
Push-button switches
[1] [Start] button
[4] [8] [5] [6] [7] [18] [19] Starts the operation of the
checkweigher.
The green lamp around the button
[9] illuminates when the checkweigher is
operating.
[10] [2] [Stop] button
[11] Stops the operation of the
checkweigher. The red lamp around
[12] the button illuminates when the
[13] checkweigher is stopped.
[3] [Home] button
Displays the Basic screen.
14
Names and Functions
15
Description of Operation Screen
● Operation screen
The display screen of an SSV series checkweigher with metal detector can be changed according
to purpose.
Each time the [Display] button in the bottom of the screen is pressed, the screen switches to
another screen in the order of: [Basic display] → [General] → [Statistics] → [Histogram] → [Show
X-bar R/s] → [Enlarge bar] → [Zoom Weight Disp.] → [Custom Disp.] → [Individual Disp.] →
[Smart guide].
Basic display
General
It collects and displays frequently used information.
P. 88 General
Statistics
This screen is used to see production control
statistics (weighed item count and weight).
ALL data or Pass. data only views are available.
P. 89 Statistics
16
Description of Operation Screen
Histogram
This screen is used to visually check the weight
distribution of weighed products.
ALL data or Pass. Data only views are available.
P. 90 Histogram
X-bar R/s
This screen is used to visually check the trend of
weight changes in weighed products.
The mean value and dispersion of each
aggregate unit (batch) are displayed in
time-series graphs. Quantity or cycle time can be
a factor to formulate a batch.
P. 90 X-bar R/s
Enlarged bar
This screen is used to visually check the real-time
variation of the weight.
An enlarged bar graph is displayed.
P. 91 Enlarged bar
17
Description of Operation Screen
Custom Disp.
This screen is used to display the opted items
only. It helps to see data need to be monitored
specifically.
P. 92 Custom Disp.
Individual Disp.
This screen is used to display the evaluation
results, each weight value and statistics for the
last 31 products checked. By keeping the data
displayed, it helps to adjust or confirm the
operations with ease.
P. 93 Individual Disp.
Smart guide (displays only when the Smart guide function is used)
This screen displays operation instructions for the
operator to prevent operation errors or an
omission of steps.
P. 78 Daily Operation Procedure
18
Description of Operation Screen
(The General screen is used as an example in the description below.)
• Double product indicates that two products exist on the weighcell conveyor unit.
• MDNG indicates that the metal detector detected metal contamination.
19
Description of Operation Screen
● Metal detection level bar and evaluation result icons
The test result for metal contamination is displayed by the metal detection level bar and icons as
shown below.
[For metal contamination checks ( P. 41) ]
Metal detection level bar Icon Detection result
No metal contamination
The metal effect value has not
*
reached the metal contamination
The red light is not turned on. evaluation reference.
Metal-contaminated product
The metal effect value has reached
Red lights (1 to 4 on the right side)
the metal contamination evaluation
turn on.
reference.
Metal evaluation could not be
completed because the product was
not carried properly.
The reason of the conveyor error
(Depending on the metal effect value)
can be checked with the alarm
displayed at the top of the screen.
P. 316 Error Messages and
Solutions
* If the evaluation of the metal contamination (or missing product) check is [OK], the final
evaluation is determined by the weighing result.
20
Description of Operation Screen
● Icon display
At the top of the operation screen, the icons are displayed to show the state of network, USB
memory and code reader.
(QUICCA, USB memory and code reader are optional.)
Disconnected
Network (Other)
Connected correctly
Disconnected
*1 Indicates the connecting status of QUICCA (Quality Management and Control System
Software by Anritsu)
*2 Appears when a USB memory when an optional USB memory is used.
*3 The animation of code reader is displayed while the bar code (Item code etc.) is readable.
21
Description of Operation Screen
● Operation and input method
■ Touch screen buttons
When a button is pressed, the corresponding
function starts.
P. 84 2. Advanced Operations
Example 1 [Menu]
The first layer of the setting menu is called.
When a button is pressed, the detailed
setting menu is displayed.
Example 2 [Others]
When a button is pressed, the submenu is
displayed above the button. When an item
is pressed, the function is called directly
without opening another menu.
22
Description of Operation Screen
■ Setting selection
When a setting is to be selected from the
provided options, a list screen containing the
options is displayed.
Select an option (the selected option is
highlighted) and press the [OK] button to
specify the option.
23
Description of Operation Screen
■ Software keypad
When a numeric value is to be entered, the keypad is displayed.
Enter a number and press the [OK] button to set the value.
BS key
Deletes the last digit.
▲ key
Increases the value by 1.
▼ key
Decreases the value by 1.
C key
Clears the input value to 0.
+/- key
Reverses positive and negative.
24
Description of Operation Screen
■ Software Keyboard
When characters are to be entered, a software keyboard is displayed.
Enter characters and press the [OK] button to set the characters.
Aa key
Switches upper case
and lower case.
Num key
Switches to input
number.
Space key
Enters one space.
25
Description of Operation Screen
Entering letters
When [A/a] is pressed, input is switched
to lower-case letters.
Korean and Chinese product names do not support output to USB memory, printer, or serial (it is
replaced with "?" when output).
Entering numbers
In addition to numbers, frequently used units
and symbols can be entered.
26
Description of Operation Screen
Entering symbols
Other symbols can be entered.
27
1 Basic Operations
This chapter describes the basic operations.
1 Basic Operations
Basic Usage 32
28
Turning on the System for the First Time
Turning on the System for the First Time
1 Basic Operations
2 When the system is started for the first
time after it has been delivered, the
Confirmation at installation screen, which
provides cautions for using the system
safely, is displayed. Be sure to read the
contents of this screen before using the
system.
2 Advanced Operations
Tap [Yes] to allow the Confirmation at installation screen to be displayed.
Tap [Do not display] to stop the Confirmation at installation screen from being
displayed when the system is started next time.
The Confirmation at installation screen shows safety messages in the following order.
29
Turning on the System for the First Time
3 Tap the [Next] button to display the next message.
1 Basic Operations
To open "Maint. and Setting", the access level must be set to 2 (manager level).
5 Appendix
30
Turning on the System for the First Time
6 Select the access level.
Refer to "Changing Access Level".
1 Basic Operations
7 Set the Date and Time.
Refer to "Setting the Date and Time”.
8 Set RJ direction.
Refer to "Setting Rejector".
2 Advanced Operations
P. 203 Setting Rejector
P. 94 Sensitivity Correction
For USB memory, printer, and signal tower settings, refer to the respective sections.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
31
Basic Usage
Basic Usage
Power switch ON
OFF
This machine has 4 access levels. Level 3 is only for Anritsu service engineers and not
available for general use. The following 3 levels can be used:
To set parameters, change the access level from "Operator Level" to "Manager Level".
5 Appendix
32
Basic Usage
1 Tapping the key icon at the upper right
part of the "Main" screen displays the
"Access Level Change" screen.
1 Basic Operations
2 Select the Manager Level radio button and click [OK]. The password input screen is
displayed.
2 Advanced Operations
Select Manager Level Password input screen
When the power is turned off while in Level 2 and turned on again, the level returns to Level 1b.
When the power is turned off while in Level 1a and turned on again, the level is Level 1a.
To change the level from Level 1a to Level 1b or Level 2, or from Level 1b to Level 2, enter the 4 Maintenance
password.
The password to Level 1b is "5555".
The password to Level 2 is "7777".
It is also possible to access the "Access Level Change" screen by selecting the "Menu"
screen → "Control Panel" → "Access Level Change".
The access level can also be set by using a function in the "Set Access Authority" screen.
P. 223 Setting Access Level By Function
5 Appendix
33
Basic Usage
> Operating and Stopping
1 Basic Operations
For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power 60 minutes prior
to the start of production. However, turning on the power 90 minutes before performing
automatic settings is recommended if the product to be tested uses evaporated aluminum or is a
food with a high salt content.
For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power at least 10
minutes before the start of production.
2 Advanced Operations
(The same applies when performing "Register new product." and "Auto-setting".)
Before starting the conveyors, remove products on the infeed, weigh, and downstream
conveyors. If operation is started while products are on the conveyors, weighing and rejection
may not be performed correctly.
■ Operating
3 Installation and Connection
■ Stopping
Tap the [Stop] button.
The conveyor stops, and the area around
4 Maintenance
34
Basic Usage
> Registering a New Product
In this equipment, parameters of up to 200 products can be registered.
Registering products allows you to perform production control properly and operate the
1 Basic Operations
equipment effectively.
When "Register new product" is tapped in the "Menu" screen, the "Product Registration
Start" screen is displayed.
Input and set a product and its parameters by following the on-screen instructions.
2 Advanced Operations
Tap [Next] to proceed to the input screen.
Tap [Next].
5 Appendix
35
Basic Usage
3 Make sure that the cursor is on "Product
Parameter Setting", and tap "Execute".
If "Enter Directly" is selected in the "Prod Para Setting Start" screen, input are made swiftly from
the parameter table.
2 Advanced Operations
36
Basic Usage
5 In the Product Dimension screen, enter
the Product Length, Width, and Height.
1 Basic Operations
is displayed. Enter a value and tap
[Next].
2 Advanced Operations
When all dimensions are entered
When the master product is placed on the weigh conveyor, the weight value is displayed. Values
4 Maintenance
are automatically entered when "Regis measured val" is tapped.
(2) Subtract the CW rejection accuracy from the determined upper and lower limits.
(3) Set the CW upper and lower limits so they are in the following range:
5 Appendix
37
Basic Usage
The following "Upper limit" and "Lower limit" are the CW upper and lower limit setting
values.
Reference
Lower value Upper
limit limit
Rejection Rejection
2 Advanced Operations
accuracy accuracy
Rejection accuracy
The rejection accuracy of this CW is represented as 3. This means that when the theoretical
rejection accuracy is 1 g, the weighing error has a 99.7% probability of being within 1 g. For
example, when measuring a 100.0 g product 1000 times, the chance that the measured weight
will exceed 100 1 g is three times.
3 Installation and Connection
Consequently, if you want to keep stricter production upper and lower limits, it is necessary
to narrow the CW upper and lower limit widths. However, in this case, there is an increased
probability that the CW will evaluate Pass products as NG products, so this should be set
based on the production quality control and yield ratio.
38
Basic Usage
9 Select a check method for the metal
detector.
■ Check metal contamination
1 Basic Operations
To check for metal contamination.
2 Advanced Operations
displayed. In this case, select "Metal
Check 3".
Even the conveyor speed is set at 70 m/min. or faster, Metal 1 can be used if the products are
tall enough (tall box, for instance) to block the optical sensors located at the side of metal
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
39
Basic Usage
10 Check if the photocell of the metal
detector detects the product.
■ Yes
1 Basic Operations
A missing product check cannot be performed if the product to be measured is not blocking the
photocell.
40
Basic Usage
13 Check the evaluation mode of the metal detector and the size of the control sensitivity
test pieces.
▼ Metal 1
1 Basic Operations
(The photocell is blocked and products
are fed through at an interval of 280 mm
or more.)
2 Advanced Operations
not blocked or products are fed through at
an interval of less than 280 mm.
▼ Metal 2
▼ Metal 3
41
Basic Usage
▼ Checking for missing products
Prepare a product containing a missing component (NG sample product) if you are
performing a missing product check.
4 Maintenance
For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power 60 minutes prior
to the start of production. However, turning on the power 90 minutes before performing
automatic settings is recommended if the product to be tested uses evaporated aluminum or is a
food with a high salt content.
5 Appendix
42
Basic Usage
For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power at least 10
minutes before the start of production.
1 Basic Operations
(The same applies when performing "Register new product." and "Auto-setting".)
15 Select New/Readjust
Press [Next] if the product number has
not been registered.
2 Advanced Operations
current settings] and press [Next] to
register a new product using the
registered product number.
properties.
43
Basic Usage
17 Check the back and forth movements of
the conveyor.
▪ Yes
1 Basic Operations
▪ No
To allow an operator to feed the master
product when performing the Auto-Set.
However, it is not appropriate to automatically move the following products back and
2 Advanced Operations
▪ A product whose height is 10 mm or less and that does not block the photocell
▪ A long product that could drop from the edge of the conveyor
▪ A product prone to changing its orientation when moved back and forth
3 Installation and Connection
44
Basic Usage
▼ Checking for metal contamination
1 Basic Operations
Feed the master product 5
times.
2 Advanced Operations
Press [Cancel] if you do not want to
have the results of auto-set applied.
The value of the estimated detection sensitivity is a rough indication of the test piece that
can be detected and is not a guaranteed value. Be sure to check the detection sensitivity
after performing the auto settings.
45
Basic Usage
Press [Completed] to terminate
registration of the product.
sensitivity mode.
[Completed].
The setting market by ★ is the highest in detection sensitivity.The sensitivity value in parenthesis
may change when auto-setting is conducted again.
46
Basic Usage
Notes on auto-set
(1) Avoid passing the master product to the next part of the line because the contaminants
1 Basic Operations
contained in the master product are not detected during auto-set. The RJ direction is
not controlled during auto-set. Be especially careful if the rejector is on standby in the
OK direction.
(2) Be careful not to use an inappropriate product during auto-set. You may not be able to
conduct a correct check, resulting in passing a contaminated or missing product.
(3) Do not feed a product heavier than the weight specified by the checkweigher.
Otherwise, the amount of heat generated by the motor may increase, and this could
lead to motor trouble and burning.
(4) Do not feed a product larger than the opening size of the MD head. The product might
2 Advanced Operations
hit the resin cover of the MD head and cause the resin cover to crack or chip.
(5) Feed the master product in the same direction and shape as that of the normal
inspected product fed on the line.
(6) If the master product does not block the photocell, block the light axis with your hand
when the master product is passing the MD head. Do not use the function for moving
the conveyor back and forth.
(7) The detection conditions may vary with each auto-set due to external noise for
instance, even if the products are the same.
(8) If the property of the master product is different from that of those actually fed in the
line, or if the product is fed in the wrong direction, the products fed during operation
(10) During auto-set, a photocell error occurs when the photocell monitoring time elapses
even for a bulk type product.
(11) For Auto-setting, the number of feeding products may increase in accordance with the
product characteristics.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
47
Basic Usage
▪ The [RJ timing adjustment/setting] button is not displayed if the system is specified to stop
when no rejector is connected or when a product is evaluated as NG.
▪ Usually, the Adjust RJ timing screen is displayed when the [RJ timing adjustment/setting]
button is tapped. Note, however, that the RJ Timing Setting screen (shown on P. 60) might
be displayed instead depending on the rejector type.
4 Maintenance
48
Basic Usage
Some types of metal detection heads have the following additional functions.
1 Basic Operations
detection probability after performing
auto-setting.
Auto-limit-setting function
2 Advanced Operations
■
▪ FOCUS Setting
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
49
Basic Usage
> Checking Operations
Operations Check is a function to check if the equipment is operating correctly.
By making sure that the equipment is operating normally at the beginning and end of
1 Basic Operations
production of a day, or at the beginning and end of a lot, operational reliability can be
guaranteed indirectly.
There are two types of operational check functions: "Accuracy Check", which checks the
accuracy of the weighcell, and "Eval./RJ Confirmation", which checks for the correct
evaluation and rejection of products. When performing an Accuracy Check, set
"Permissible Accuracy" and "Accuracy Check Sample Count" in advance.
2 Advanced Operations
Smart Guide can also be used to check operations during the daily operations procedure.
P. 209 Using Smart Guide
Select "Accuracy check settings", set "Permissible Accuracy" and "Accuracy Check
Sample Count", and tap [Back].
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
This sets the permissible range for the measurement
accuracy.
When the measurement accuracy calculated from the
4 Maintenance
50
Basic Usage
Select "Common set for Ope. Check" and check the conditions specified.
For the settings at the end of an operation check, see the following table.
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Initial Setting:_)
When an operator feeds a product according to the
Eva/RJ Check Fix Route instructions on the screen, the operator can check
the device operation.
Print at end of
This sets on or off for the function that automatically
operation check
No prints out the operation check results at the end of an
(displayed only when operation check.
Yes
a printer is
* Only when using the printer option
connected)
This sets on or off for the function that automatically
2 Advanced Operations
Print stat data at No prints out the statistics data at the end of production
production end Yes when Smart Guide is used.
* Only when using the printer option
This sets on or off for the function that automatically
Store at end of No saves the operation check results to USB memory at
operation check Yes the end of an operation check.
* Only when using the USB memory option
This sets on or off for the function that automatically
Save stat data at No saves the statistics data to USB memory at the end
production end Yes of production when Smart Guide is used.
* Only when using the USB memory option
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Eval./RJ Sample 2 to 10 Set the number of sample products used for an
Count (Initial value: 3) evaluation/rejection check.
Test Piece Size Φ0.0 Set the size of the Fe test piece used in the pattern
(Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0) method for the operation check.
Test Piece Size Φ0.0 Set the size of the SUS test piece used in the pattern
4 Maintenance
51
Basic Usage
■ Accuracy check
1 Select "Others" → "Accuracy Check",
check the product number and product
name, and tap [Next].
1 Basic Operations
52
Basic Usage
Feed the master product for the number
of times specified in "Accuracy Check
Sample Count" and make sure that "OK"
is displayed. Tap [Completed] to return to
1 Basic Operations
the Home screen.
If "Failed" is displayed, check for any incorrect setting values. Tap the "Details" button
to display a list of information during the accuracy check.
2 Advanced Operations
■ Eva/RJ check
This function is used to check that the checkweigher is performing evaluation and
rejection correctly. For the Eva/RJ check, feed a product that is actually used on the
production line.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
53
Basic Usage
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to feed an OK product, +NG product, and -NG
product to the conveyor in this order.
Check that evaluation and rejection are performing correctly by feeding a PASS
1 Basic Operations
54
Basic Usage
> Adjusting Registered Products
This is the procedure for modifying the
specified conditions for registered products.
1 Basic Operations
Detailed information omitted in the Product
Registration Navi can also be entered.
Select the “Menu” screen → “Adjust
registered products” → “Product settings”.
The screen to the right is displayed.
2 Advanced Operations
■ Product information
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Product information)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Sets the product name. This is the same as Disp
(Max. 14 characters
Type1 in the “Enter Product Information” screen.
in Japanese)
Product Name To register both Product name and Product name2,
(Max. 28 characters
55
Basic Usage
■ Ins. condition set
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Ins. condition settings)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
Reference Value Weight Range Sets the reference value for the product.
+Limit Displays the value set for the product.
-Limit Displays the value set for the product.
Tare Weight Displays the value set for the product.
Test Piece Size Φ0.0
Sets the test piece size Fe.
(Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0)
Test Piece Size Φ0.0
2 Advanced Operations
56
Basic Usage
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
If the evaluation value of a product fed through with
the bulk type setting (photocell is not used) is equal
1 Basic Operations
MD Ultra under 0.3
to or lower than this parameter, it is not counted.
limit (0.0 to 10.0)
When data is retrieved in the histogram while the
product is not fed through, set a larger value.
Parameter to set the algorithm for signal processing.
The variation of work effect value may become larger
Algorithm 1 if 2 is set.
2
1 Set to stabilize the detection sensitivity.
2 Set to enhance the detection sensitivity.
2 Advanced Operations
This is the check method being used for the currently
selected product.
If a product is evaluated as NG
in a metal evaluation, the
product being fed is evaluated
as NG.
Metal check Set this when the interval
(bulk) between fed products is 280 mm
or less, when the product cannot
rejected individually.
57
Basic Usage
■ Set conveyor speed
Set main conveyor speed
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → conveyor speed → Set main
conveyor speed)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Main Conveyor 50
Sets the CW Conveyor Speed.
Speed (5 to 120 m/min)
Set this parameter when a two speed conveyor
Conveyor Speed High (optional) is used.
H/L Low High Main conveyor speed (high speed)
2 Advanced Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
RJ Conveyor 50
Sets the conveyor speed of the rejector.
3 Installation and Connection
58
Basic Usage
■ Measurement timing
Measurement timing set
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Measurement timing →
Measurement timing set)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
T0
Timer to acquire the MDNG signal (optional).
(MDNG valid (0 to 6000) ms
This timer is automatically set (parameter per product).
time)
T1 Displays the time until the product moves onto the
(Measurement (30 to 6500) ms weigh conveyor. The value is calculated
delay time) automatically when the product length is input.
2 Advanced Operations
T2 Displays the weigh cell stabilization time. The value
(Stabilization (40 to 6500) ms is calculated automatically when the product length is
time) input.
59
Basic Usage
■ RJ timing
RJ timing settings
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → RJ timing → RJ timing settings)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
T3
Sets the rejector delay time (from the end of weighing
(Rejection delay (1 to 9999) ms
to the start of rejector operation).
time)
T4
(RJ operation Sets the RJ operation time (from start to end of RJ
(45 to 9999) ms
operation).
time)*1
This parameter is automatically set according to the
Auto specified RJ model type. When this is set to "Auto", T3
2 Advanced Operations
RJ Timing
manual and T4 are automatically set by inputting the RJ
Conveyor Speed.
This parameter is automatically set according to the
specified RJ model type.
Pulses Pulses The RJ output is kept for T4 time.
RJ Output Type*2
Hold
The current RJ output is kept until the next
Hold
RJ output.
Selects the +NG product processing.
* If Pass Stats is specified, +NG product data is not
3 Installation and Connection
60
Basic Usage
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Set the rejection operation when T4 of the next
product overlaps during T4 (rejection hold time). Set
1 Basic Operations
this item when using a rejector that has a low rejecting
performance such as a shuttle rejector.
Performs the rejection operation after T3
Evaluate
Rejection output Evaluate Priority (Rejection delay time) according to the
Priority
control*4 NG Priority latest evaluation result.
Extends the rejection operation in the NG
direction when the first product is evaluated
NG
as NG and the next product is evaluated as
Priority
2 Advanced Operations
OK. The operation is extended for T4 of the
next product.
*1
When a product with a large metal effect value such as aluminum tape is fed,
MDNG evaluation is held depending on the conveyor speed set, and no rejection
can be done during the hold time.
Main conveyor speed [m/min] Hold time [sec]
9 or less 10.0
61
Basic Usage
■ Detection sensitivity
Adjust detection sensitivity
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Det. Sens. → Detection sens. settings)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Eval. Limit
Magnification (Fe)
Eval. Limit
Magnification (SUS) This parameter sets the evaluation limit
2 Advanced Operations
Eval. Limit
Magnification (ML4)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Φ0.0 Set the size of the Fe test piece for the control
Test Piece Size
sensitivity (the value indicating the size of the test
(Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0) piece used as the detection reference).
Φ0.0 Set the size of the SUS test piece for the control
Test Piece Size
sensitivity (the value indicating the size of the test
(SUS) (φ0.0 to 20.0) piece used as the detection reference).
5 Appendix
Φ0.0 Set the size of the Non-Fe test piece for the control
Test Piece Size
sensitivity (the value indicating the size of the test
(Non-Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0) piece used as the detection reference).
62
Basic Usage
■ Statistic product settings
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Statistic product settings)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
Batch Cycle Qty. (1 to 999999) Sets the cycle (count) of the production batch.
Batch time (1 to 14,440 minutes) Sets the cycle (time) of the production batch.
Sets the upper limit of Xbar (mean value) in the "X-R"
(-9999.99 screen and "X-s" screen.
X-bar +limit
to +9999.99 g)
This is used for management purposes.
Sets the lower limit of Xbar (mean value) in the "X-R"
(-9999.99 screen and "X-s" screen.
X-bar -limit
to +9999.99 g)
This is used for management purposes.
2 Advanced Operations
These parameters are the frequency distribution
Histogram Scale (0.01 to +9999.99) pitch and frequency distribution -NG limit for the
“Histogram” screen used to see a detailed view of the
boundary between PASS and NG products.
Auto-setting is performed when the reference value
and +NG and -NG limits are input. Set these
parameters manually when you want to change the
Histogram Lower (-9999.99
auto-set values. When the settings are changed
Limit to +9999.99)
during operation, the correct frequency distribution
results are not obtained if the statistics are not
cleared.
63
Basic Usage
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
You can set whether to perform the automatic
calculation.
1 Basic Operations
changed.
Calculates the histogram scale and
histogram lower limit every time either
of the standard value, lower limit value,
Yes and upper limit value is changed.
Changes the histogram auto setting to
“No” when the histogram scale or
histogram lower limit is manually set.
■ Conveyor mode
3 Installation and Connection
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
No Perform weight evaluation.
Yes Set when weight evaluation is not to be performed.
CW Conveyor Set when weight evaluation, MDNG (metal NG)
Mode Yes evaluation, and EXNG (external NG) evaluation are not
(Force Motor ON) to be performed. This setting is also effective when an
extremely long product, etc., is to be forcibly conveyed.
MD Conveyor No Sets when use the conveyor without metal
Mode Yes contamination detection.
4 Maintenance
64
Basic Usage
■ Metal Detector
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Metal Detector)
Fe Side setting
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Set whether to save the results of tracking the Fe phase
by the auto tracking function.
Clears the tracking phase when the power
Not Save is turned off, the conveyor stops, or the auto
setting is performed.
Save
Fe: Tracking data Save the tracking phase when the conveyor
Not Save
2 Advanced Operations
stops. The auto tracking function starts at
this time.
Save
Note that the auto tracking data is cleared
when the power is turned off or the auto
setting is performed.
Normally, you do not have to change this parameter
50
Fe: S1 because the metal detector automatically sets the
(0 to 250)
optimum value.
Normally, you do not have to change this parameter
0
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Set whether to save the results of tracking the SUS
phase by the auto tracking function.
Clears the tracking phase when the power is
Not Save turned off, the conveyor stops, or the auto
setting is performed.
4 Maintenance
SUS: Save
Tracking data Not Save Save the tracking phase when the conveyor
stops. The auto tracking function starts at
this time.
Save
Note that the auto tracking data is cleared
when the power is turned off or the auto
setting is performed.
Normally, you do not have to change this parameter
50
SUS: S1 because the metal detector automatically sets the
(0 to 250)
optimum value.
5 Appendix
65
Basic Usage
■ Product check
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Product check)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
Set whether to perform a product check.
No Does not perform a product check.
Performs a product check when the
conveyor starts running first after the
power is turned on or the product is
No Standard changed. Note that a product check is
Default Phase
Standard not performed when the product is
Correction
2 Advanced Operations
P. 230 Correcting the Phase based on Characteristic Change (product check function)
5 Appendix
66
Basic Usage
■ HIS setting details
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → HIS setting details)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
Algorithm auto
Yes Sets the algorithm automatically based on the results
selection
No of HIS settings when “Yes” is set.
2 Advanced Operations
This is the optimum processing method determined
SUS: FNo * Read only
based on the result of the HIS setting.
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Hi freq. : FSNo.2
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
67
Basic Usage
■ Tracking conditions
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Tracking conditions)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
This parameter sets parameters related to auto tracking
from the characteristics during the production.
OFF When measuring a product that requires auto-tracking
Standard function, the auto-tracking function is automatically
Temp Chg1 enabled according to the auto-setting. But if the status of
Temp Chg2 the product changes rapidly, the auto-tracking function
Temp Chg3 might not be enabled with the parameters set by the
auto-setting. To prevent this problem from occurring, this
Var-1
parameter can be used to set the tracking parameter for
Var-2 supporting rapid changes. The settings Temp Chg1 to
2 Advanced Operations
Var-3 Temp Chg3 and Var-1 to Var-3 can be set after the
Tracking Type auto-setting is performed without a need of performing
the auto-setting again.
It is also possible to disable the auto-tracking function
forcibly.
setting is performed.
Set whether to save the results of tracking the SUS
phase by the auto tracking function.
Clears the tracking phase when the power
Not
is turned off, the conveyor stops, or the
Save
SUS: auto setting is performed.
Tracking data Save/Not Save Save the tracking phase when the
conveyor stops. The auto tracking function
starts at this time.
Save
5 Appendix
68
Basic Usage
1 Basic Operations
■ Full detection
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Full Detection)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
2 Advanced Operations
is detected until the conveyor is stopped.
■ NG Rate
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → NG Rate: NG)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
P. 178 NG rate
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
0
Counter Preset Sets the count for the counter preset.
(0 to 999999)
5 Appendix
69
Basic Usage
■ RJ operation adjustment
(Adjust registered products → RJ operation adjustment → RJ Parameter table)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
RJ Conveyor
(5 to 120 m/min) Set conveyor speed of rejector.
Speed
Sets the RJ Speed automatic calculation to Enabled or
Auto Disabled.
manual The RJ Conveyor Speed is automatically calculated
* If RJ Conveyor when the CW Conveyor Speed or product length is input
Speed is set
while this parameter set to "Auto", or this parameter is
RJ conveyor spd. manually when
changed from “Manual" to "Auto".
2 Advanced Operations
T4
Sets the RJ operation time (from start to end of RJ
(RJ operation (45 to 9999 ms)
operation).
time)
This parameter is automatically set according to the
Auto specified RJ model type. When this is set to "Auto", T3
RJ Timing
manual and T4 are automatically set by inputting the RJ
Conveyor Speed.
This parameter is automatically set according to the
specified RJ model type.
Pulses
RJ Output Type* Pulses The RJ output is kept for T4 time.
Hold
The current RJ output is kept until the next RJ
4 Maintenance
Hold
output.
* The default of RJ Output Type depends on the type of Rejector.
■ Auto-set
(Adjust registered products → Auto-set)
Readjust the sensitivity setting if the sensitivity decreases due to a change in product
properties such as temperature, water content, and shape, which causes a false
detection.
5 Appendix
70
Basic Usage
> Handling Errors and Alarms
When the equipment detects any abnormality, an error or alarm message is displayed on
the screen.
1 Basic Operations
The date and time when the error occurred, model name, serial number, and a detailed
description of an error appears automatically, and tapping the[Help] button while
an alarm message is displayed makes a detailed description appear. If there are multiple
possible measures, they can be viewed sequentially by tapping the [Others] button. When
the buzzer alarm is enabled ( P. 184 Setting Signal Tower and Buzzer), it can be
stopped by tapping the [No sound] button.
Check the description and act according to the description. Tap the [Close] button and tap
2 Advanced Operations
the Reset button to cancel the display.
Operations cannot continue until the system recovers the error.
Operation can continue even when an alarm message is displayed. The equipment can
be stopped when an alarm is displayed by the parameter settings. Perform settings
according to the production line.
Reset button
When the "Contact the SE" message is
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
71
Basic Usage
■ Checking the error or alarm occurrence status
The types and numbers of errors or alarms that have occurred are listed.
This function is used for a daily check of the production status of device status during or
1 Basic Operations
after production.
Note that you may be asked to describe the message displayed on the screen when
making a customer support inquiry.
1 Select [?] → [Alarm occurrence status].
Tap [Latest date] or [Counts] to sort the
list in the order of date or number of
occurrences.
2 Advanced Operations
72
Basic Usage
> If NG frequently occurs
If the metal detector frequently detects metal incorrectly, you can check what might be
causing the incorrect detection by following the guidance.
1 Basic Operations
1 Select [?] → [If NG frequently occurs...].
2 Advanced Operations
2 Select the NG type and then tap [Next].
73
Basic Usage
5 Tap [Next] to check the contents sequentially.
6 Tap [Completed].
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
2 Tap [Next].
This function automatically controls the
operation (on/off) of the conveyor. Do not
perform this operation during production
4 Maintenance
74
Basic Usage
4 Display the inspection results.
Tap [Details] to confirm the possible
causes.
1 Basic Operations
If the problem persists or occurs again
later, contact your customer support.
5 Tap [Next].
By saving the data here, you can output
2 Advanced Operations
the inspection results if requested by
your customer support.
6 Tap [Completed].
75
Basic Usage
List of inspection results
or other Separate the power source or change one plug to different nearby
devices outlet.
False detection may occur by electromagnetic noise generated from a
device with an inverter.
Change carrier frequency of an inverter by following the device
operation manual.
Peripheral MD may affect and cause false detection.
Need to arrange peripheral devices around or change frequency.
3 Installation and Connection
Take measure to keep the objects away. If it does not solve a problem,
Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
5 Appendix
76
Basic Usage
SN-04 False detection may occur due to filthy conveyor belt.
Noise from Clean the conveyor belt. There may be residue left on the belt.
conveyor ( P.273 Cleaning)
movement Any fray or scratch found, the belt should be replaced.
1 Basic Operations
( P.286 Removing the Conveyor Belt/Roller, P.297 Removing the
Conveyor Belt)
When conveyor belt has any contact to MD aperture, it would lead to
possible false detection.
Ensure to keep the conveyor belt not to come in contact with MD
aperture.
( P.289 Adjusting Belt Alignment, P.299 Adjusting Belt Alignment)
2 Advanced Operations
Roller deformation faulty motor would generate influential noise and
cause false detection.
Check any abnormality on exterior of conveyor unit. Call Anritsu or its
distributor for service.
* The system can easily be influenced by external noise if the evaluation limit
magnification value is too low. If the test piece can be detected with sufficient margin,
increase the evaluation limit magnification value or perform auto-setting again.
77
Daily Operation Procedure
Daily Operation Procedure
Power switch
If the optional Emergency Stop Switch is Press to stop CW
fitted, press it to stop the checkweigher in an in an emergency
emergency.
An alarm message (A361) is displayed on the
screen.
method
(a) Release Emergency Stop Switch
Turn the head of the switch in the marked
direction.
(b) Use the Reset button to reset the alarm.
Tap the Reset // button displayed on the
screen.
(c) Tap the Stop button to stop the
checkweigher.
Address the cause of the emergency stop,
remove the product on the checkweigher
3 Installation and Connection
operations to prevent incorrect operations or the omission of steps. Smart Guide is set at
factory shipment. You can also perform operations without following the Smart Guide.
78
Daily Operation Procedure
1 Basic Operations
Press the [Zero Set] button when nothing is on the weigh conveyor and make sure
that the weight display is zero. If any tare value is set, the setting value is shown as a
negative number.
(2) Sensitivity check
Place the reference weight on the weigh conveyor and make sure that the correct weight is
displayed.
The following describes the standard flow of operations when using Smart Guide.
2 Advanced Operations
1 Perform an inspection before starting
operations.
■ Checking for contact with other devices
Make sure that the checkweigher is not in contact with the upstream/downstream
conveyors or peripheral devices.
■ Cleaning the conveyor and weigh unit
79
Daily Operation Procedure
3 Perform an inspection and check before
starting production.
Perform the following operations by
following the on-screen instructions.
1 Basic Operations
[Next] is not enabled until the product registration completes (product parameter setting and
auto-setting must be finished).
To adjust the detection sensitivity of metal detector, press [Adjust detection sensitivity ].
80
Daily Operation Procedure
■ Operation check before production
Tap [Next] to perform an operation check
before production. Press the Start button
and feed an OK product, +NG product,
1 Basic Operations
and -NG product in this order.
4 Start production.
2 Advanced Operations
For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power 60 minutes prior
to the start of production. However, turning on the power 90 minutes before performing
automatic settings is recommended if the product to be tested uses evaporated aluminum or is a
food with a high salt content.
Before starting the conveyors, remove any products that are on the infeed, weigh, or
downstream conveyors. If operation is started while products are on the conveyors, weighing
and rejection may not perform correctly.
81
Daily Operation Procedure
5 Perform a check at production completion.
When 1 of "Display" is selected while
operation is stopped, the screen on the
right is displayed.
1 Basic Operations
again.
82
Daily Operation Procedure
7 Execute end process.
When "Execute end process" is selected
in the screen above, the screen on the
right is displayed.
1 Basic Operations
Tap "Start inspection" and perform
inspection by following the on-screen
instructions.
After the inspection is complete, the following screen is displayed. Tap [Complete
current process].
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
After turning off the power, be sure to:
■ Clean the weigh unit.
■ Clean the belt top and back surfaces.
■ Clean the checkweigher.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
83
2 Advanced Operations
This chapter describes the operations according to the purpose.
Screen Hierarchy 85
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment 94
2 Advanced Operations
84
1 Basic Operations 2 Advanced Operations 3 Installation and Connection 4 Maintenance 5 Appendix
Screen Hierarchy
The screen system of this checkweigher is as follows.
85
Screen Hierarchy
Screen Hierarchy
*1
Product information
Product settings
Inspection condition set
Conveyor Mode
Tracking conditions
Full detection
NG Rate
3 Installation and Connection
Counter Preset
*2 *6
RJ operation adjustment Adjust RJ timing
Functions Photocell monitoring
RJ Parameter table
Smart guide settings
Full detection
*3 NG Rate
Home display settings Home screen disp. sel. Counter preset
Ope. Check menu sel. Product check
Prod. Control menu sel. Auto Limit Setting
Set/Adj menu sel. Prod. management settings **
Other Menu sel. Multi range **
Custom display screen settings
*7
Basic screen disp. settings
4 Maintenance
86
Screen Hierarchy
*5
Unit/connected device set
Weighcell Sensitivity Correction
Weighcell check
Zero-set
1 Basic Operations
Weighcell settings
2 Advanced Operations
Signal tower settings
I/O output settings
IO timing adjustment
*9
Device Information Version Information
Device Information settings
*10
Maintenance Information User Information
5 Appendix
87
Viewing Measurement Data
Viewing Measurement Data
> General
2 Advanced Operations
See “Description of Operation screen” (P. 16) for details about the metal detecting level
3 Installation and Connection
88
Viewing Measurement Data
> Statistics
If the target data for statistics is set to [ALL],
the total count and OK, NG products, and
1 Basic Operations
double product count and percentage (%)
are displayed in the left side of the Statis
screen. In the right side of the screen, the
accumulated total weight, mean value
(X-bar), standard deviation (s), randomness
(R), maximum value (Max) and minimum
value (Min) are displayed.
To switch the target data for statistics, press the [ALL] button (all products including NG
2 Advanced Operations
products) and [Pass] button (PASS products only) in the lower right part of the screen.
Item Explanation
Total Current total count of all products since statistics last cleared
Current total count and percentage of all PASS products since statistics last
OK
cleared
-NG Current total count and percentage of all -NG products since statistics last cleared
+NG Current total count and percentage of all +NG products since statistics last cleared
Current total count and percentage of all MDNG products is detected since
MDNG
89
Viewing Measurement Data
> Histogram
The measurement results from the statistics
clear to the present are displayed in the
1 Basic Operations
orientation.
Item Explanation
X bar Current mean weight since statistics last cleared.
s Current standard deviation of weighed products since statistics last cleared.
R Displays |Max - Min|.
Max Current max weight since statistics last cleared.
Min Current min weight since statistics last cleared.
Weight Measured weight of the product.
3 Installation and Connection
The standard deviation and randomness width can be switched by pressing [R]/[s] below
the graph.
[ALL] (all products including NG products) or [Pass] (PASS products only) can be selected
as target data for statistics.
The meanings of the words displayed on the graph are as follows. UCL and LCL are used
as guidelines for control of production. The settings can be specified by selecting "Adjust
registered products" "Product settings" "Statistic Product Settings" in the "Menu"
screen.
5 Appendix
90
Viewing Measurement Data
X-bar UCL (Upper Control Limit, X-bar +Limit, yellow line)
Mean upper limit value. It is automatically calculated as the reference value
plus UCL (X-bar +Limit).
It is set in "UCL (X-bar +Limit)" in the "Statistic product settings" screen.
1 Basic Operations
CL (Center Line, blue line)
Mean weight value for the batch.
LCL (Lower Control Limit, X-bar -Limit, red line)
Mean lower limit value. It is automatically calculated as the reference value
minus LCL (X-bar -Limit).
It is set in "LCL (X-bar -Limit)" in the "Statistic product settings" screen.
s UCL (Upper Control Limit, yellow line)
2 Advanced Operations
Upper limit of standard deviation. It is set in "s +Limit" in the "Statistic product
settings" screen.
CL (Center Line, blue line)
Mean standard deviation (or randomness width) of the batch.
R UCL (Upper Control Limit, yellow line)
Upper limit of randomness. It is set in "R +Limit" in the "Statistic product
settings" screen.
CL (Center Line, blue line)
91
Viewing Measurement Data
> Zoom Weight Disp.
The graph is excluded from the weight
display screen, and the measured value is
1 Basic Operations
production data.
In the lower right part of the screen, the production total, OK product count, and NG
product count from the statistics clear up to the present time are displayed.
■ When “No” is selected at “Display area 2”, the lower half part of the display will be
blank.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
92
Viewing Measurement Data
> Individual Disp.
The evaluation results and each weight
value of the last 31 products are displayed in
1 Basic Operations
sequence. The weight value surrounded with
a yellow frame is the latest one.
The statistics appeared at the bottom of the
screen are from the data currently displayed
on the screen only.
2 Advanced Operations
is pressed, update of display is stopped.
Press [Restart] to resume update.
Press [Clear] to delete the display of data
and statistics.
Update of display is stopped
93
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
in advance.
94
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
Perform the operations in Step 1 through Step 3 by following the on-screen instructions.
When placing the weight on the weigh conveyor, place it at the center.
1 Basic Operations
"Level" below the weight display indicates the percentage in the weight capture range.
2 Advanced Operations
If an error or an alarm message is
displayed, refer to "Error Messages and
Solutions" and perform the appropriate
actions, and then perform sensitivity
correction again.
95
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
> Fine Adjustment
When the weight of the master product and the displayed value during operation are different,
the displayed value needs to be corrected. This correction is called fine adjustment.
1 Basic Operations
Conveyor belt
Master product
2 Follow the instructions on the "Fine Adjustment" screen and enter the values of the
master product weight.
5 Appendix
96
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
3 Feed the master product.
When feeding the master product, make
sure that the orientation and the position
on the belt are fixed.
1 Basic Operations
Press [Next] and then press the Start
button to start the conveyor. Follow the
on-screen instructions and feed the
2 Advanced Operations
master product through the conveyor 10
times.
When the message "Fine adjustment has finished normally” is displayed, fine adjustment
is complete. Press [Completed].
97
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
2 In the "Timing Adjustment" screen, press the "Prod Len" area to display the input
screen.
4 Press the Start button and feed a product to display the product timing and damping
waveform.
Feed a product several times, and obtain the waveforms. Adjust T2 by finding a point
with minimal randomness (dispersion).
4 Maintenance
To change the range of the graph vertical axis (weight value), press [Vert. range] in the
upper right part of the screen or slide your finger to the vertical axis direction on the
graph.
To change the range of the horizontal axis (time) of the graph, press [Time] or slide
your finger in the direction of the horizontal axis on the graph.
Press [Clear] in the lower right part of the screen to clear the waveform data.
To restore the timing after changing it, set Measurement timing to "Auto”. T1, T2, and
the filter time will return to the original values.
5 Appendix
98
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
> Adjusting the RJ timing
(Adjust registered products. → Product settings → RJ timing → RJ timing adjustment)
The RJ timing can be adjusted by feeding through a product and checking the evaluation
1 Basic Operations
result. Tap the [Reset timing] button to set T3 and T4 automatically.
2 Advanced Operations
> Auto Settings (Readjusting registered products)
Readjust the sensitivity setting if the sensitivity decreases due to a change in product
properties such as temperature, water content, and shape, which may cause a false
detection.
99
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
3 Select [Make auto setting by using
current settings] and then press [Next].
1 Basic Operations
100
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
▼ Metal contamination check
1 Basic Operations
times.
2 Advanced Operations
displayed. Press [Completed] to apply
the new settings.
The value of the estimated detection sensitivity is a rough indication of the test piece that can be
detected and not a guaranteed value. Be sure to check the detection sensitivity after performing
101
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Measured values
■ History (Operation History, Parameter History, NG History, Alarm History, Operation
Check History)
■ Parameters set to the checkweigher (product parameters, common parameters)
■ Support data (used when a trouble occurs in the checkweigher)
The data recorded to the USB memory is in the CSV format and can be edited easily by
2 Advanced Operations
using any spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel (except for information for
restoration after a failure).
The USB memory recommended by Anritsu includes data viewer software (Conversion
Tool) that can create statistics data from measured values.
The specifications regarding USB memory are as shown below.
Item Description
Max Speed Measured value output 600 products/min
3 Installation and Connection
The number of days to save data in the USB memory for the production volume per day is
shown below.
Production volume/day 10,000 50,000 100,000 200,000 500,000
Standard 8.2 years 1.6 years 300 days 150 days 60 days
Detail 5.5 years 1.1 years 200 days 100 days 40 days
5 Appendix
102
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
1 Basic Operations
falsely, and data may be destroyed. This may also result in losing the
checkweigher’s ability to record data.
(2) Inserting and removing USB memory
USB memory can be inserted or removed while the power is ON. After completing
the removal command, remove the USB making sure that the writing indication
LED has turned off. If the USB memory is removed while the LED is still blinking (or
if power is suddenly turned off while the LED is still blinking), it may result in
destroying the data and the data may become unreadable. After removing USB
memory, make sure to close the cover. Otherwise, foreign objects or water may
2 Advanced Operations
enter during cleaning, resulting in failure of the equipment.
Do not insert the USB memory again immediately after you have removed it. The
USB memory might not be recognized if it is re-inserted immediately after removal.
(3) Operation when no USB memory is inserted
When there is no USB memory inserted, an alarm will be generated. Normal
operation can be run but the data will not be recorded.
(4) Operation when USB memory capacity is exceeded
When USB memory capacity is exceeded, an alarm will be generated.
After the alarm, data will not be recorded to the USB memory. Move data to a PC
Open
Close
103
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Removing USB memory
This section describes how to remove USB memory.
To remove USB memory safely, make sure to perform the "removal" operation in the
1 Basic Operations
checkweigher.
Open
3 Installation and Connection
If USB memory is removed during data recording, files may be destroyed and become
unreadable. Before removing USB memory, make sure that data is not being recorded by
checking the LED on the USB memory.
Especially when measured values are being recorded in high production capacity, USB memory
may be accessed more than 10 seconds after the last product is fed. Make sure to check the
LED blinking state before removing USB memory.
4 Maintenance
USB memory
5 Close the cover and turn the knob.
Knob
Turn
Close
5 Appendix
104
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ File/folder configuration of USB memory
Data recorded by the checkweigher is stored in folders sorted by date. As device
information, folders can optionally be set with a Level 1 and Level 2 "Line Name" and
"Sub-number".
1 Basic Operations
"Record Type" and "Serial number" are automatically added to a file name. The serial
number counts up in the following cases, and a new file is created. When the date
changes, the serial number returns to 00. When the serial number is 00, addition of the
serial number to the file name is omitted.
2 Advanced Operations
■ When the power is turned on again
Level 2 folder
Record type Record data
Header
CW HEADER.csv
INDIV_01.csv
Statistics
Record STATS 20120913 SBTS.csv
Directory STTS.csv
20120914 SBTS.csv
STTS.csv
Parameter
Record PARAM 20120913 PP.csv
Directory
20120914 PCOM.csv
5 Appendix
"Level 1”, "Level 2”, "Record Type”, and "Year/Month/Day" folders are created automatically by
this unit.
105
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ USB memory storage settings
("Menu" "USB memory/printer" "Set USB Memory store")
When data is recorded to USB memory, the Level-1 Folder and Level-2 Folder can
optionally be specified to identify the device. To manage recorded data, specify folder
1 Basic Operations
names before use. By adding an expiration date to data recorded to USB memory,
insufficient capacity of USB memory can be resolved.
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Sets the USB memory folder structure.
USB Memory Level-1 Disable Disable Sets the standard folder structure.
Folder Enable Sets a specified character string to the
2 Advanced Operations
Enable
folder name.
Sets folder name for the USB memory folder structure.
USB Memory Level-1 (Up to 4
Do not enter a single-byte space at the beginning of a
Folder Name characters)
folder name.
Sets the USB memory folder structure.
USB Memory Level-2 Disable Disable Sets the standard folder structure.
Folder Enable Sets a specified character string to the
Enable
folder name.
3 Installation and Connection
106
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Select the details of the measured value to be output.
Outputs the measured date, option code,
1 Basic Operations
Standard
USB Memory Meas. Standard rank code and measured value.
Out Contents Detail Outputs the product interval and other
Detail data in addition to the contents output
when Standard is selected.
Enables and disables the function to automatically
Store at operation No
save the operation check results into USB memory at
check end Yes
the end of the operation check.
To specify whether to save Statistical data
2 Advanced Operations
Save stats data at No automatically to USB memory at the end of the
the production end Yes production while the Smart Guide function is being
used.
Specify the batch saving cycle (0 to 9999, 4 digits
maximum).
USB Memory Batch 0
The batch saving cycle indicates the number of batches
Output Cycle (0 to 9999)
to save records into the USB memory. Specify “0” to
save only total statistics instead of using batch saving.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
107
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Selecting data to record
Select data to record to USB memory and contents to be saved.
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
1 Basic Operations
Standard
USB Memory Meas. Standard rank code, measured value, etc.
Out Contents Detail In addition to the standard contents,
Detail “Product interval” and other options are
available
Weights are not saved when “Statistics” is set to “Only PASS” and “Meas. Value Output” is set to
“Only NG”.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
108
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Folder and file names
Measured value data is saved as "INDIV_ΔΔ.csv" (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under
the folder "RECORD".
Data items are recorded to USB memory in the CSV format (comma-delimited) in the
1 Basic Operations
order of the table below.
Item Remarks
ID Code Measured value ID code [ ] (space)
Product No. Product No.
Measured Value Output
Serial number for recording measurement data
No.
Date and Time Measurement date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
2 Advanced Operations
Normal: Space
MDNG: 0
EXNG: 1
RJ check error (RJNG): 2
Option Code *Only when RJ check option is used and the "Meas. Out Contents"
parameter is set to "Details”.
When evaluations are entered simultaneously, option code is output in
the following order of priority.
E +NG
F +OVERFLOW +OVERFLOW
109
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Item Remarks
Weight value
Measured Value
*Space code is output for D-Prod., +OVERFLOW.
Detection sensitivity/evaluation limit factor
1 Basic Operations
110
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Item Remarks
Zeroset state at weighing
Zeroset* No zeroset: 0
Zeroset: 1
1 Basic Operations
Zero value at weighing
Zero AD Value*
0 to 65535
Product Length* Product length measured at photocell for weighing. Unit is mm.
Product Interval* Interval from product fed previously. Unit is ms.
Time from the start of blocking the photocell for weighing by product to
Product Movement
the start of blocking RJ photocell. Unit is ms.
Time*
* Only when the RJ check option is used
2 Advanced Operations
Product Blocking Time Time in which product blocked RJ photocell. Unit is ms.
(rejector) * * Only when the RJ check option is used
* Parameters from "Zeroset" to "Product Blocking Time (rejector)" are recorded when "Meas. Out
Contents" parameter is "Details”.
If Microsoft Excel is installed, double-click the file to open Excel and load the CSV file.
111
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Saving batch statistics data
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Sets Batch output cycle (MAX 4 digits: 0 to 9999).
1 Basic Operations
USB Memory Batch 0 This specifies the cycle for outputting batch data to a
Output Cycle (0 to 9999) USB memory stick. Input 0 to disable batch recording
and only record the total statistics.
Batch Sta. Out No. Number of times batch statistics are output
Compilation Start Batch statistics start date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Compilation End Batch statistics end date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Statistics Method 0: All products statistics 1: PASS statistics
Product Name Product name
Lot No. Lot No.
Batch Count Batch count
-NG Zone A count -NG count Zone A count
PASS Zone B count PASS count Zone B count
Zone C count Zone C count
4 Maintenance
112
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Item Description
Standard EEC option Standard EEC option
Standard deviation (exceptions: MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Standard Deviation
Statistics Target)
1 Basic Operations
Maximum weight (exceptions: MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Maximum Weight
Statistics Target)
Minimum weight (exceptions: MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Minimum Weight
Statistics Target)
RANGE Maximum Weight - Minimum Weight
Reference Value Reference setting value
TU2 TU2 Limit setting value
Lower Lower limit
TU1 TU1 Limit setting value
Limit setting value
2 Advanced Operations
Upper Upper limit
TO1 TO1 Limit setting value
Limit setting value
TO2 TO2 Limit setting value
Zone B PASS In Zone B, count rejected as PASS because
count within permissible range
Percentage of Zone B PASS count in PASS
Zone B TU1%
count
Zone C PASS In Zone C, count rejected as PASS because
count less than mean value
113
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
(2) Record format
Data items are recorded to USB memory in the CSV format (comma-delimited) in the
order of the table below.
1 Basic Operations
■ Accuracy Check
Item Description
ID Code History type "4"
History Type Outputs history type.
Product No. Product No.
Product Name Product name
2 Advanced Operations
Permissible
Permissible accuracy
Accuracy
Measurement
Accuracy of the results measured by accuracy check
Accuracy
Count Measurement count
X-bar Mean value
S Standard deviation
R RANGE
Max Maximum value
Min Minimum value
4 Maintenance
114
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Eva/RJ Check
Item Description
ID Code History type "4"
1 Basic Operations
History Type Outputs history type.
Product No. Product No.
Product Name Product name
History No. History serial number
Date and Time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Event Event occurred
Result Result
2 Advanced Operations
User Access level
Reference Value Reference value
Upper Limit Upper limit
Lower Limit Lower limit
Test Piece Size (Fe) Set value
Test Piece Size (SUS) Set value
Metal Eval. Level 1 Set value
Evaluation value 3
Evaluation value 3 N
Evaluation value 4
Evaluation value 4 N
Rejection N Rejection
Result N Pass/NG of check result
5 Appendix
115
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Saving total statistics data
Select "Menu" "USB memory/printer"
"Save to USB memory”, select the target
item to save from the list in the left part of the
1 Basic Operations
Total statistics data is saved as "STTS_ΔΔ.csv" (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under the
folder "STATS”.
116
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Item Description
Standard EEC option Standard EEC option
Mean value (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not Statistics
Mean Value
Target)
1 Basic Operations
Standard deviation (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Standard Deviation
Statistics Target)
Maximum weight (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Maximum Weight
Statistics Target)*
Minimum weight (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Minimum Weight
Statistics Target)*
RANGE Maximum Weight - Minimum Weight*
Reference Value Reference setting value
TU2 TU2 Limit setting value
2 Advanced Operations
Lower limit
Lower Limit TU1 TU1 Limit setting value
setting value
Upper limit
Upper Limit TO1 TO1 Limit setting value
setting value
TO2 TO2 Limit setting value
Zone B PASS In Zone B, count rejected as PASS because
count within permissible range
Percentage of Zone B PASS count in PASS
Zone B TU1%
count
117
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Saving parameter data
Similarly, select [Parameter] and press
[Save].
1 Basic Operations
118
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Saving history data
Similarly, select [History] and press [Save].
1 Basic Operations
History / NG History/ Alarm
History / Operation Check
History
Target: Output all product data
All products
Output data for one product
Only selected products
2 Advanced Operations
Out. range: All data
All data recorded in history
Past 24 hours
Data recorded in the past 24 hours
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
119
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
(2) Record format
Data items are recorded to USB memory in the CSV format (comma-delimited) in the
order of the table below.
1 Basic Operations
Item Description
ID Code History type "4"
History Type Outputs history type.
Product No.
Product No.
("-" is the output if product does not exist)
2 Advanced Operations
(2) Format
USB memory can be formatted by pressing the [Format] button.
When data cannot be recorded to the USB memory, format the USB memory. USB
memory can be formatted on the checkweigher or on a PC.
5 Appendix
Once USB memory is formatted, all data is erased. Erased data cannot be recovered.
120
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Reference: Formatting USB memory on a PC
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
2 Right-click the USB memory drive, and select [Format].
121
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
3 Make sure that the file system is "FAT”, and press [Start].
1 Basic Operations
Make sure to format the USB memory as a "FAT" file system. USB memory formatted with a file
system other than "FAT" does not operate on this unit. Leave Volume Label blank. If Volume
Label is used, it may not operate.
122
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
> Setting External I/O Signals
This section describes input and output signals for external control.
To adjust I/O timing, refer to "Adjusting I/O Timing”.
1 Basic Operations
P. 149 Adjusting I/O Timing
2 Advanced Operations
IN2 OUT2
OUTA1, OUTA2, OUTA3,
KCU2504A INA1, INA2, INA3, INA4,
OUTA4, OUTA5, OUTA6,
Expansion I/O (optional) INA5, INA6, INA7, INA8
OUTA7, OUTA8
OUTB1, OUTB2, OUTB3,
For Anritsu Expansion INB1, INB2, INB3, INB4,
OUTB4, OUTB5, OUTB6,
(optional) INB5, INB6, INB7, INB8
OUTB7, OUTB8
Signal tower and buzzer
― OUTP1, OUTP2, OUTP3
(both optional)
4 Maintenance
123
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Select the target destination and press [Input]. The input screen is displayed. For
descriptions of the items, refer to the table below.
Type Explanation
- No signal input
This is the Operate/Stop switch input.
Switches between operation and stop every time this input is set to
ON. Set the input ON time at 100 ms or faster.
Mot. ON/OFF This signal cannot be used at the same time as “Mot. ON/OFF
(Momentary)
(Alternate)” or “Mot. ON/OFF2 (Alternate)”. When both signals are set,
this signal is prioritized.
2 Advanced Operations
If this input is switched to stop while the IO output signal “Error” is ON,
turn it OFF.
This is the Operate/Stop switch input.
The device is in the operating status while this input is ON.
Mot. ON/OFF This input cannot be used at the same time as the “Mot. ON (Pulse
(Alternate)
input)” signal. When both signals are set, this signal is prioritized.
If this input is switched to stop while the IO output signal “Error” is ON,
turn it OFF.
Run input. The Checkweigher runs while this input is ON.
3 Installation and Connection
However, the Mot. OFF (Par. Priority)input has priority over this input
and this input cannot stop the Checkweigher. Use the Mot. OFF(Par.
Mot. ON (Pulse input) Priority) input to stop the Checkweigher. The signal ON time must be
at least 100 ms.
In addition, the "Mot. OFF(Par. Priority)" input has priority over this
input.
Mot. OFF The conveyor motor is forcibly stopped while this signal is ON. The
(Par. Priority) conveyor motor cannot be set to ON while this signal is ON.
Input for rejecting weighed products in EXNG direction irrespective of
weight rank. The rejector gate operates at the same timing as at
External NG input weight NG. For bulk-type products, use EXNG (Continuous +
(Synchronous) Synchronous).
P. 395 T iming chart
4 Maintenance
Stop dividing input (OK3) Division function. Ranking is not performed while this input is ON.
Stop dividing input (OK4)
124
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Type Explanation
Input signal for rejecting Pass products in EXNG direction. Rejection
of NG products is unaffected by whether this signal is ON or OFF and
External NG input for pass
NG products are rejected in the specified NG rank direction. (The
product (Synchronous)
priority rank of the external signal by this input is lower than the weight
1 Basic Operations
evaluation NG.)
Clear Statistics Clears the statistics data.
Clears stored tare value when using optional Net Weight Calculation
Clear stored tare value
function.
Input for rejecting weighed products in EXNG2 direction irrespective
of weight rank. The rejector gate operates at the same timing as at
weight NG.
External NG input 2
(Synchronous)
P. 395 T iming chart
This signal can be used with the EXNG: S or EXNG: A.
2 Advanced Operations
EXNG2 is normally higher priority evaluation than EXNG. For
bulk-type products, use EXNG2 (Continuous + Synchronous).
Input for rejecting weighed products in EXNG2 direction irrespective
of the weight rank. The rejector gate operates in the EXNG2 direction
while this signal is ON. However, to avoid the risk of rejector gate jams
External NG input 2 during normal rejector gate operation intervals (T4), the gate operates
(Continuous + Synchronous) after the rejector gate operation.
This signal can be used with the EXNG: S or EXNG: A.
EXNG2 normally has a higher priority evaluation than EXNG. For
box-type products, use EXNG2 (Synchronous).
Input for detecting full rejected-products box.
Switches target head number to next head when using optional Head
Head Change
Statistics function for Automatic Combination Weigher.
Resets target head number to first one when using optional Head
Head Select
Statistics function for Automatic Combination Weigher.
Auto Zeroset OFF Automatic zero adjustment is disabled while this input signal is active.
Clears statistics data, count of “Counter preset”, and Tare memory
All Clear
count data (when using optional net weight calculation function).
This switches the Checkweigher to the Conveyor mode while this
Forced motor ON input signal is ON even if the Checkweigher is in normal operation.
(Alternate switch) However, when a conveyor error is generated, the Checkweigher
cannot run (in the Conveyor mode) even if this input goes ON.
5 Appendix
125
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Type Explanation
This is the Operate/Stop switch input.
Switches between operation and stop every time this input is set to
ON. Set the input ON time at 100 ms or faster.
1 Basic Operations
Mot. ON/OFF2 This signal cannot be used at the same time as “Mot. ON/OFF
(Momentary)
(Alternate)” or “Mot. ON/OFF2 (Alternate)”. When both signals are set,
this signal is prioritized.
Even if this input is switched to stop, the IO output signal “Error” is not
turned OFF.
This is the Operate/Stop switch input.
The device is in the operating status while this input is ON.
Mot. ON/OFF2 This input cannot be used at the same time as the “Mot. ON (Pulse
(Alternate)
input)” signal. When both signals are set, this signal is prioritized.
2 Advanced Operations
Even if this input is switched to stop, the IO output signal “Error” is not
turned OFF.
The conveyor motor is forcibly stopped while this signal is ON without
releasing error output.
Mot. ON disabled
Use the “Mot. OFF(Par. Priority)” input for releasing error output with
the conveyor-motor stop at the same time.
While the conveyor speed setting is “2 Speed”, the conveyor speed
Conveyor 2 Speed
decreases if this input signal is active and increases if it is inactive.
This is a conveyor error input signal available only for the
Carrying Unit Error Checkweighers for aerosol cans (which have a model name starting
3 Installation and Connection
OptionInput1
OptionInput2
Settings for options
OptionInput3
OptionInput4
5 Appendix
126
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Types of output signals
Output Type
Type Signal Explanation (at standard output type)
Setting
- No signal output
1 Basic Operations
Standard
Motor ON This signal is ON while the Checkweigher conveyor is running.
Pulse
This signal is ON while the Checkweigher is in an abnormal
ABNORMAL
Standard status (EXXX displayed).
Pulse This signal is ON when the Checkweigher is in an abnormal
BUZZER Hold 2 status and when is it stopped by NG products in the NG Stop
mode.
This signal is ON when the following alarm occurrs and product
RJ Alarm
Standard is discharged in alarm direction.
Direction
2 Advanced Operations
Target: A051 to A055, A504
This signal is ON when the operation status is abnormal, or
CONVEYOR Standard when the conveyor is stopped by NG evaluation or when an
STOP Pulse Auto-zeroset alarm (A011) is generated. It is used for stopping
an upstream conveyor.
This signal is ON when the Checkweigher is able to perform
weight measurement.
This signal is OFF when the Checkweigher is stopping,
Measurable Standard
performing fine adjustment, adjusting timing, performing
Operation check, performing Auto setting, generating error,
NG Stop,and Conveyor mode.
127
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Output Type
Type Signal Explanation (at standard output type)
Setting
When “2 Speed” (option) is set, this output is ON when the
speed setting of current product No. is LOW and goes OFF
Conveyor 2 when it is HIGH.
1 Basic Operations
Standard
Speed When the conveyor is set to OFF, this output goes OFF.
However, when the conveyor speed setting is changed from
HIGH to LOW, this output goes ON.
This goes ON when the product count set at the “Preset Pattern”
reaches the counter preset. This signal is used for downstream
Pulse dividing equipment and rejection box switching equipment.
Counter preset
Hold 2
Clear the preset count, clear all, change the product switch or
turn off the power switch to clear the preset counter.
Pulse This signal is output when the weighed product is evaluated as –
Hold 1 NG or +NG. It is not output when the products is evaluated as
NG Output
2 Advanced Operations
Reject sync MDNG, external NG, external NG2, Double product alarm or
Hold 2 Product Length Exceeded alarm.
This output goes ON when the Full detection input is ON for 5
Detection full Standard
seconds. It goes OFF when the Full detection input is OFF.
Pulse
This signal is output when weighed products are evaluated as
Ultra-under Hold 1
lighter than the Ultra Under Limit. It is not output when the Ultra
output Reject sync
Under Limit is not set.
Hold 2
This signal is output when the weighed products are evaluated
Pulse as PASS.
Hold 1
OK Output
3 Installation and Connection
Reject sync * It is not output at MDNG, external NG, external NG2 , Double
Hold 2 product alarm or Product Length Exceeded alarm, even when
the weighed products are evaluated as PASS.
Monitoring
This checks the controller CPU at starting and outputs a 500-ms
output for CPU Standard
pulse when operation is normal.
operation
This is enabled when the EEC function (option) is used and the
Standard "EEC (Prod.)” at the “Product Parameter Setting” is set to “Yes”.
Pulse * This is disabled when the “EEC Function (Average)” at the
4 Maintenance
Reference value
Hold 1 "Product Parameter Setting" is set to “Yes”).
alarm
Reject sync It does not depend on the batch number and outputs when the
Hold 2 mean value is below the reference value. The mean value is
calculated only using PASS product data.
Serial Output signal for optional KW255A and KW2504A/B.
Communication Standard This alarm is output when an error occurs at serial
Alarm communications.
USB Memory
Standard This alarm is output when an USB-related error occurs.
Related Alarm
This is a weigh-cell-ready output signal available only for the
Checkweighers for aerosol cans (which have a model name
READY Standard
5 Appendix
128
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Output Type
Type Signal Explanation (at standard output type)
Setting
NGBOX OPEN
Standard
RJ1 These output signals are used to enable the corresponding
NGBOX OPEN NGBoxes with electronic locks (optional) to open.
1 Basic Operations
Standard
RJ2 These signals become active if the NGBoxes are unlocked,
NGBOX OPEN enabling the NGBoxes to open.
Standard
RJ4 These signals do not become active if they are selected while no
NGBOX OPEN NGBox with an electronic lock is connected.
Standard
RJ5
This signal goes ON when the metal detector is operating in the
conveyor mode, such as in the cases below. This signal is
available for checkweighers that have a metal detector.
MD conveyor The product parameter “MD Conveyor mode” is set to “Yes”.
Standard
mode output
2 Advanced Operations
The metal detector is operating in the forced conveyor mode.
The Forces motor ON signal (Forced Motor ON) is input for the
external control input.
Output OUT1 by reset pulse when the safety relay unit is
mounted
Safety relay Type Pulse
Pulse
reset
Logic Not Reverse
Latency 300 ms
Checking This outputs signal while the Checkweigher conveyor is running
Standard
operation when using Eval/RJ Check, Accuracy Check and Check Mode.
129
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Logic, Type, Delay Time, and Hold Time settings
Setting
No. Name Description
(Default: )
1 Basic Operations
For connection terminals, refer to Appendix "External I/O Specifications" and "Timing
Chart”.
P. 385 External I/O Specifications, P. 395 Timing Chart
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
130
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Usually use “IO input setting”. Use “IO input setting (Details)” when setting the logical
combination of the signal.
1 Basic Operations
(Maint. And Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Gen. I/O connection → IO input
setting (Details) )
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Input Signal ID No Input Displays the signal name.
Selects the input terminal No. of terminal block.
Corresponding numbers are described below: Do not
2 Advanced Operations
change.
Input Terminal
0 to 255 IN1.2 180, 181
No. 1
INA1 to INA8 182 to 189
INB1 to INB8 190 to 197
Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the input signal from the
Input Logic 1
Reverse selected terminal.
Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
Delay Time 1 0 to 9999
selected terminal.
Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the input signal from the
Input Logic 2
Reverse selected terminal.
Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
Delay Time 2 0 to 9999
selected terminal.
Delay Time 2 Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
0 to 9999
(Low) selected terminal.
Signal Specifies the logical connection of the signals input
None/And/Or
Connection 2 from the input terminal No. n and [n+1].
5 Appendix
131
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Selects the input terminal No. of terminal block.
Corresponding numbers are described below: Do not
1 Basic Operations
change.
Input Terminal
0 to 255 IN1.2 180, 181
No. 3
INA1 to INA8 182 to 189
INB1 to INB8 190 to 197
Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the input signal from the
Input Logic 3
Reverse selected terminal.
Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
Delay Time 3 0 to 9999
2 Advanced Operations
selected terminal.
Delay Time 3 Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
0 to 9999
(Low) selected terminal.
Signal Specifies the logical connection of the signals input
None/And/Or
Connection 3 from the input terminal No. n and [n+1].
Rejector
Conveyor
Checkweigher
Metal detector
3 Installation and Connection
132
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Usually use IO output setting. Use “IO output setting (Details)” when setting the
combination of the signal.
1 Basic Operations
(Maint. And Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Gen. I/O connection → IO output
setting (Details) )
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Selects the input terminal No. of terminal block.
Corresponding numbers are described below: Do
not change.
Output Terminal
2 Advanced Operations
0 to 255 OUT1.2 80, 81
No.
OUTA1 to OUTA8 82 to 89
OUTB1 to OUTB8 90 to 97
Output Signal
No Output Displays the signal name.
ID1
Pulse
Hold1
Specifies the format of the signal output from the
Output Type 1 RJ Sync.
output terminal block.
133
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Specifies the delay time of the signal output from the
Hold Time 2 0 to 9999
output terminal block.
1 Basic Operations
Standard
Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the signal output from the
Output Logic 3
Reverse output terminal block.
Specifies the delay time of the signal output from the
Delay Time 3 0 to 9999
output terminal block.
Specifies the delay time of the signal output from the
Hold Time 3 0 to 9999
output terminal block.
Signal Specifies the logical connection of the signals output
None/And/Or
3 Installation and Connection
134
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Extension I/O connection setting
(Maint. And Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Gen. I/O connection → Extension
I/O connection setting)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Selects the method of treating error occurring upon
abnormal IO-NET connection.
This parameter is set to Yes if the
EXT-I/O (channel A) connection is
detected when the power is turned
Extension I/O Auto Auto
to ON. This parameter is not
(A): Connection No
changed to No when the EXT-I/O
2 Advanced Operations
monitoring Yes
(channel A) is not connected.
Restrains the occurrence of the
No
abnormal IO-NET connection.
Generates the occurrence of the
Yes
abnormal IO-NET connection.
Selects the method of treating error occurring upon
abnormal IO-NET connection.
This parameter is set to Yes if the
135
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Set other conveyor
(Maint. And Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Conveyor →Set other conveyor)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
Selects the method of treating error occurring upon
abnormal IO-NET connection.
This parameter is set to Yes if the
MOT-CONT connection is detected
when the power is turned to ON.
Auto Auto
MOT-CONT: This parameter is not changed to No
No
connect check when the MOT-CONT is not
Yes
connected.
2 Advanced Operations
136
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Serial connection
When inputting and outputting data in connection with external devices such as code
reader, specify the settings by referring to the table below.
1 Basic Operations
Serial1 Setting
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Serial connection → Serial1
Setting)
2 Advanced Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the connection method of Serial1 I/O.
Does not connect to the external
No No
device.
Yes
Serial1:Connection Yes Connects to the external device.
Labeler
Code Reader Labeler Connects to the Label printer.
137
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the serial input/output type.
No Outputs no data.
1 Basic Operations
Serial1:Output 1
Outputs measured value for each
Meas. Value
weighing.
Outputs batch mean value at the end
Mean Value
of a batch.
No
Meas. Value Outputs batch statistics data at the end
Serial1:Output 2 Stat. Value
Mean Value of a batch.
Stat. Value Meas. Outputs data with product number
2 Advanced Operations
Length
specified as space)
138
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the type of measured values output during
operation check in serial 1 I/O.
1 Basic Operations
No Does not output measured values.
2 Advanced Operations
2 phase value. This setting is available for
Checkweigher with M6-h series metal
detector.*2
Selects whether statistics data to output in serial I/O or
not by operating Indicator.
No
Serial1:Total Stats
Stat. Value No Not output.
Out
Stat. V. 2 Stat. Value Outputs in statistics value format.
Stat. V. 2 Outputs in statistics value 2 format.
139
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Leave it as Old (Default setting).
Serial1:Comm. Old
Old KD80XX series
1 Basic Operations
message New
New KD81XX, KD82XX series
Specifies whether to read the item code in the product
barcode by the barcode reader.
The item code cannot be read by the barcode
No
Serial1:Item code No reader. Enter the item code using the touch
Yes
panel.
The item code can be read by the barcode
Yes
2 Advanced Operations
reader.
Serial1:Item code 2 Specifies the start digit of the item code in the product
(start digit) (1 to 20) barcode.
Specifies the number of digits of the item code in the
Serial1:Item code 6 product barcode.
(digit count) (0 to 20) If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent
digits are regarded as the item code.
Specifies whether to read the user code in the barcode
of the user by the barcode reader.
3 Installation and Connection
140
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Serial2(A) settings
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Serial connection → Serial2(A)
settings)
1 Basic Operations
* The items displayed differ depending on the Serial2(A):Connection setting.
*1 Setting for Anritsu optional equipment. Not use for other equipment.
*2 Prod. No. in the message corresponds to 3 digits (up to 200 products).
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the connection method of Serial2(A) I/O.
No Does not connect to the external device.
2 Advanced Operations
Connects to the external device (other
No
Yes than Anritsu Product, Labeler or Code
Yes
Serial2(A): Reader).
Anritsu Product
Connection Anritsu
Labeler Connects to the Anritsu device.
Code Reader Product
Labeler Connects to the Labeler.
Code Makes a connection with a code reader
Reader (optional).
141
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the serial 2(A) input/output type.
No Output no data.
1 Basic Operations
142
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the type of measured values output during
operation check in serial 2(A) I/O.
1 Basic Operations
No Does not output measured values.
2 Advanced Operations
phase value. This setting is available for
Checkweigher with M6-h series metal
detector.*2
Selects whether statistics data to output in serial A I/O or
Serial2(A):Total No not by operating Indicator.
Stats Out Yes No Not output.
Yes Outputs in statistics value format.
Selects the type of measured values output during
operation check in serial 2(A) I/O.
143
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Serial2(A):Item
2 Specifies the start digit of the item code in the product
code (start
1 Basic Operations
(1 to18) barcode.
digit)
Specifies the number digits of the item code in of the
Serial2(A):Item
6 product barcode.
code (digit
(0 to 18) If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent digits
count)
are regarded as the item code.
Specifies whether to read the user code in the barcode of
the user by the barcode reader.
Serial2(A):User No
The user code cannot be read by the barcode
code Yes No
2 Advanced Operations
144
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Serial3(B) settings
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Serial connection → Serial3(B)
settings)
1 Basic Operations
* The items displayed differ depending on the Serial3(B):Connection setting.
*1 Setting for Anritsu optional equipment. Not use for other equipment.
*2 Prod. No. in the message corresponds to 3 digits (up to 200 products).
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the connection method of Serial3(B) I/O.
Does not connect to the external
2 Advanced Operations
No
device.
No Connects to the external device (other
Yes
Serial3(B): Yes than Anritsu Product, Labeler or Code
Anritsu Product
Connection Reader).
Labeler
Code Reader Anritsu Product Connects to the Anritsu device.
Labeler Connects to the Labeler.
Makes a connection with a code
Code Reader
reader (optional).
145
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the serial 3(B) input/output type.
No Outputs no data.
1 Basic Operations
146
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the type of measured values output during
operation check in serial 3(B) I/O.
1 Basic Operations
No Does not output measured values.
2 Advanced Operations
value. This setting is available for
Checkweigher with M6-h series metal
detector.*2
Selects whether statistics data to output in serial B I/O or
Serial3(B):Total No not by operating Indicator.
Stats Out Yes No Not output.
Yes Outputs in statistics value format.
Selects the type of product number link in serial 3(B) I/O.
Set this to No.
serial3(B) I/O.
Serial3(B):State No
Does not output state change to the serial3(B)
Chg. Output Yes No
I/O.
Yes Outputs state change to the serial3(B) I/O.
Specifies whether to read the item code in the product
barcode by the barcode reader.
Serial3(B):Item No
The item code cannot be read by the barcode
code Yes No
reader. Enter the user code using the touch panel.
5 Appendix
147
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Serial3(B):Item
2 Specifies the start digit of the item code in the product
code (start
1 Basic Operations
(1 to18) barcode.
digit)
Specifies the number digits of the item code in of the
Serial3(B):Item
6 product barcode.
code (digit
(0 to 18) If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent digits
count)
are regarded as the item code.
Specifies whether to read the user code in the barcode of
the user by the barcode reader.
Serial3(B):User No
The user code cannot be read by the barcode
code Yes No
2 Advanced Operations
148
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
> Adjusting I/O Timing
This screen monitors input and output signals for external control. Use this screen for
input and output signals that require a timing adjustment.
1 Basic Operations
In the "Menu" screen, select "Maint. and
Setting" "Unit/connected device set.”
From "Gen. I/O connection”, select "I/O
timing adjustment”.
2 Advanced Operations
The adjustment screen shown on the right is
displayed.
149
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
> Connecting Ethernet (LAN)
When connecting to the network via Ethernet, select "Maint. and Setting"
"Unit/connected device set.” "Network connection" in the "Menu" screen, and specify
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
2 Advanced Operations
150
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Comm. content settings
(Maintenance and Setting Unit/connected device set. Network connection
Comm. content settings)
1 Basic Operations
* Prod. No. in the message corresponds to 3 digits (up to 200 products).
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Network: No
Sets whether to connect to the network.
Connection Yes
Standard
Network: Applicable
QUICCA Selects the applicable connection.
connection
Mobile monitor
2 Advanced Operations
Outputs measured value for each weighing.
Outputs measured value by
Variable Length adjusting text length according to
weight value.
Outputs weight value in 8-digit fixed
Fixed length length. (G is included and blank
Invld. parts are specified as space)
Variable Length
Fixed Length Prod. Outputs measured value with
Prod. (variable (variable length) product number at variable length.
length) Prod. Outputs measured value with
Prod. (Fixed (Fixed length) product number at fixed length.
151
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Selects the type of measured values output during
operation check in network I/O.
Does not output measured value at
1 Basic Operations
No
operation check.
Outputs measured value at operation
No Yes
check.
Yes
Network: Out when Outputs measured values with product
Expansion Expansion
ope check number added.*
Expansion 2
The measurement value is output during
an operation check together with product
Expansion No., product effect value and phase
2 value. This setting is available for
Checkweigher with M6-h series metal
2 Advanced Operations
detector.*
Selects the format of statistics data for the statistics
Network: Total stats. Stat. Value read command.
Contents Stat. V. 2 Stat. Value Outputs batch/total statistics data.
Stat. V. 2 Outputs batch/total statistics data 2.
Selects the type of product number link output in
network I/O. Set this to No.
No
Network: Product No Does not output data.
Yes
link
Expansion Yes Outputs data.
3 Installation and Connection
152
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Selects operation when a communication alarm occurs
during operation.
1 Basic Operations
When data accumulation function is available,
generates
Network:Proc. at Alarm alarm when communication is disconnected and
comm. alarm Error accumulation starts. After reaching limit, operates
according to the settings below.
Processes communication alarm as
Alarm
alarm.
Error Processes communication alarm as error.
2 Advanced Operations
This parameter specifies how long to wait before
regarding connection as being terminated for periodic
data reception from QUICCA (optional) or the PC, in
seconds since the last data was received. The
Network:Keep alive
10 communication status is not monitored if 0 is specified.
timer
The connection status is indicated by the connection
status icon on the QUICCA connection status display
screen. This parameter is valid if “Ethernet” is specified
for the “Data out device” parameter.
No specified QUICCA.
Network:Connection
Yes
license No The network connection is not licensed.
* Read only
Yes The network connection is licensed.
5 Appendix
153
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
Time synchronization setting
(Maintenance and Setting Unit/connected device set. Network connection
Time synchronization setting)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Network:SNTP time No Selects whether to perform time synchronization
sync. Yes with external server using NTP.
Network:SNTP
0 to 60 (10) min
connect interval (M)
Specifies interval of NTP synchronization.
Network:SNTP
0 to 59 (0) sec
connect interval (S)
2 Advanced Operations
Network:SNTP
255.255.255.255 Specifies IP address of NTP server.
server
Network:SNTP TD -23 to +23 (+9)
adjustment (H) hour Specifies time difference between installation site
Network:SNTP TD and Greenwich mean time.
0 to 59 (0) min
adjustment (M)
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
154
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
■ Setting on the PC
Start the "Command Prompt" on a PC connected to a common network, enter the ping
command with the IP address (e.g. ping 192.168.0.1), and press the [Enter] key.
1 Basic Operations
For Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7, select "All
Programs" "Accessories" "Command
prompt" to open the command prompt.
2 Advanced Operations
command prompt.
For Windows 10, select "All apps" " Windows System Tool" “Command prompt” to
open the command prompt.
• Network status
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected
device set. → Network connection →
• Version upgrade
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected
device set. → Network connection
→Version upgrade)
This function updates the software of the
4 Maintenance
When the screen to the right is displayed, C:¥>ping 192.168.0.1 ← Command entered
network settings are complete. Pinging 192.168.0.1 with 32 bytes of data:
155
Other Settings and Adjustments
Other Settings and Adjustments
Square
2 Press the square button on the screen. button
3 Installation and Connection
If you choose not to press [YES] before the end of YES YES
countdown, the system returns to Step 2.
5 Appendix
156
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Checking Version Info
Press Help [?] → [Version Info.] to display
the checkweigher model, serial number,
1 Basic Operations
version information of the software, and
details on options.
2 Advanced Operations
The password can be changed or initialized by following the steps below.
157
Other Settings and Adjustments
▼ Changing the password
3 Select the access level.
After selection, tap [Next].
1 Basic Operations
4 Enter "Current password”. When the box is pressed, the keypad will be displayed.
Enter the password and press [OK].
2 Advanced Operations
158
Other Settings and Adjustments
▼ Initializing the password
3 Select "Initialize Password", select the
target access level, and press [Yes].
1 Basic Operations
When the initialization is completed
successfully, the following screen is
displayed. Press [Completed].
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
159
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Setting the Date and Time
1 When top area of the screen with date
and time is pressed, the input screen is
1 Basic Operations
displayed.
Upper column:Year/Month/Day
Lower column:Hour:Minute:Second
3 Installation and Connection
Entering “Hour”
After entering values, press [OK] to finish
4 Maintenance
setting.
5 Appendix
160
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Setting the Language
1 Press "Language" in the "Menu" screen.
Or press “?” icon, and select [Language].
1 Basic Operations
The language can also be set by
selecting [?] → "Language".
2 Advanced Operations
> Changing the Display Language
By registering the product names and the user names in two languages in advance, the
display language can be switched to suit each operator.
Registering product names in two languages. Displaying in the “Product list” screen.
161
Other Settings and Adjustments
2 Select “Standard language” and press
[OK].
1 Basic Operations
The following table shows an example when specifying Portuguese as [Disp Type1]
and English as [Disp Type2].
Setting of Standard
Auto Portuguese English
language
2 Advanced Operations
▪ When starting up, the display language is the one specified as standard language.When
3 Installation and Connection
specifying the standard language setting to “Auto”, the display language is the one specified
as the display language.
▪ Specify the product name to be displayed in either of the following methods:
(1) Disp Type1 and Disp Type2 in the “Enter Product Information” screen
P. 36 Registering a New product – Step 4
(2) Product Name and Product name2 in the “Product information” screen
P. 55 Product information
* For M5, use method (2) for setting.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
162
Other Settings and Adjustments
■ Switching display language on Product list and User list screens
When pressing [Fn] button on the lower right of the screen while the product list is
displayed in the language specified in [Product Name], [Product name change] appears
on top of the submenu list. Press [Product name change] to display the names in the
1 Basic Operations
language specified in [Product name 2]. To display the product names in the language
specified in [Product Name], follow the same procedure to switch the language from
[Product Name] to [Product name 2].
2 Advanced Operations
Switching display language (for product names)
163
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Setting Conveyor Speed
This is to set the conveyor speed of the main unit and rejector to be connected.
It is optional for M5.
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Main Conveyor 50 m/min Sets the CW conveyor higher speed according to the
Speed (High)*1
2 Advanced Operations
*1 and *2 can be set when the conveyor speed is “2 Speed”, and *3 can be set when the
conveyor speed is set to “Fixed”.
3 Installation and Connection
RJ conveyor settings
(Maintenance and Setting Unit/connected device set. Conveyor RJ conveyor
settings)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
RJ Conveyor Speed 50 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed to high.
(High)*1 (0 to 120)
RJ Conveyor Speed 50 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed to low.
(Low)*2 (0 to 120)
50 m/min
4 Maintenance
*1 and *2 can be set when the conveyor speed is “2 Speed”, and *3 can be set when the
conveyor speed is set to “Fixed”.
5 Appendix
164
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Statistics Control
This is to make detailed settings for the statistics.
1 Basic Operations
Basic Statistics Setting
(Stats Control Basic Statistics Setting)
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Selects contents of printed/output statistics
All Prints statistics data for all products
Prints and outputs the statistics for
2 Advanced Operations
PASS products only (PASS statistics).
All Only Pass
This applies to individual printing as
Statistics Only Pass
well.
Both
Prints and outputs both the total
statistics and PASS statistics (to serial
Both
I/O and USB memory). For individual
printing, the total statistics are printed.
This sets the statistics printing contents.
Prints dispersion range, maximum
165
Other Settings and Adjustments
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Selects Batch Cycle units
Uses count as batch cycle units
1 Basic Operations
166
Other Settings and Adjustments
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
If "Yes" is set, statistics data is saved to USB when
statistics are cleared.
1 Basic Operations
USB Stats Save At No Statistics data is not saved to USB when statistics are
Stats Clear Yes cleared from "Serial", "Ethernet", or "General I/O". It
cannot be used with "Smart Guide" or "Product
Change Stats Clear".
2 Advanced Operations
Zeroset settings
(Maintenance and Setting Unit/connected device set. Weighcell Zeroset
settings)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Selects zero-setting operation
Not necessary to change setting in normal use
167
Other Settings and Adjustments
Weighcell settings
(Maintenance and Setting Unit/connected device set. Weighcell Set weighcell)
Setting
Name Explanation
1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
Sets whether or not to round the weight to the nearest
No zero.
Zero Rounding
Yes When Yes is selected, weights near zero (within ±0.1%
of weight range) are displayed as 0 g.
Inputs Ultra Under Limit.
The Ultra Under Limit is used to exclude products that
are very much lighter than the reference value from the
0.00
statistics targets.
2 Advanced Operations
weight)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
168
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Security and Rules
This is to set prohibited items regarding the operation.
1 Basic Operations
Policy settings view
(Maintenance and Setting Security and rules Policy settings list)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Change Parameter Enable Used to disable to change parameters during
(ope.) Disable operation.
Enable
Chg. Prod. (ope.) Used to disable to change product during operation.
Disable
2 Advanced Operations
Selects CW conveyor operation at error
Does not stop conveyor. Products are
rejected in the direction set at the
Nonstop
“ALARM direction” column on the “RJ
Nonstop direction settings” screen.
Processing Error
Stop Stops conveyor. When the conveyor is
stopped, selection of “Stop” and
Stop “Nonstop” settings for the “NG Rate
169
Other Settings and Adjustments
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Selects checkweigher conveyor operation for NG
products.
1 Basic Operations
Product reg. navi: Yes Displays FOCUS setting in the items of “Register new
FOCUS No product.” when “Yes” is set.
Product reg. navi: Yes Displays auto-limit setting in the items of “Register
Auto-limit No new product.” when “Yes” is set.
The errors/alarms cannot be released at
None
Error/Alarm Batch None once by pressing the [Stop] button.
Release [Stop] button [Stop] The errors/alarms can be released at
button once by pressing the [Stop] button.
5 Appendix
170
Other Settings and Adjustments
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Does not display the evaluation value in
No the “General” and “Sensitivity
1 Basic Operations
Evaluation value No Adjustment” screens.
display Yes Displays the evaluation value in the
Yes “General” and “Sensitivity Adjustment”
screens.
Sets whether to display the screen for selecting
whether to display the Confirmation at installation
At start/inst check No screen at system startup.
display Yes
No Do not display
2 Advanced Operations
Yes Display
The access level at power-on can be configured.
Auto The access level when the power is next
turned on depends on the access level
when the power was last turned off.
Access level at start Auto Access level at Access level at
of work 1a power-off next power-on
1a 1a
release errors.
Auto Logoff Time automatically changes the access
level to 1a if the inspection system is not operated for
Auto Logoff Time 0 to 60 (Min.) a certain period of time after switching to the manager
level (Access level 2). If 0 is set, the auto log-off time
becomes invalid.
* “+NG Product” and “NG Product” are displayed when “Common” is specified for
“Common/By product”.
Common/By product
5 Appendix
171
Other Settings and Adjustments
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Setting related to +NG product processing.
Specifies that +NG product processing be
1 Basic Operations
172
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Specifying the installation check settings
Installation check setting
(Maintenance and Setting Installation check Installation check setting)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Sets whether to display the screen for selecting
whether to display the Confirmation at installation
At start/inst check No screen at system startup.
display Yes
No Do not display
Yes Display
2 Advanced Operations
This records whether "Cautions for safety" on the
Check cautions for Unfinished
Confirmation at installation screen has been
safety Finished
performed. This parameter cannot be changed.
This records whether "Handling caution 1" on the
Check handling Unfinished
Confirmation at installation screen has been
caution 1 Finished
performed. This parameter cannot be changed.
This records whether "Handling caution 1" on the
Check handling Unfinished
Confirmation at installation screen has been
caution 2 Finished
performed. This parameter cannot be changed.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
173
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Other Functions
■ Photocell monitoring
(Maintenance and Setting Functions Photocell monitoring)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Sets error detection operation of photocell for
measurement.
Photocell error occurs when product
ON interrupts photocell for time set at
ON "Photocell Error Time”.
Photocell Error Notify
ON/OFF In addition to the above error detection,
2 Advanced Operations
174
Other Settings and Adjustments
■ Smart Guide setting
(Maintenance and Setting Functions Smart Guide)
Setting
Name Explanation
1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
Sets ON/OFF of the function that displays operation
instructions to operate the checkweigher properly on
No
Smart guide the screen.
Standard
If the setting value is Standard, operation instructions
are displayed on the screen.
Displays the [Register new product] button in the
“Phase 2” screen when using smart guide.
No
2 Advanced Operations
Does not display the [Register new
1a No
Phase 2: Prod Reg. product] button.
1b
2 Displays the [Register new product]
1a to 2 button when the access level is equal to
or higher than the specified level.
Displays the [Adjust detection sensitivity] button in
the “Phase 2” screen when using smart guide.
No
Does not display the [Adjust detection
Phase 2: Detect. 1a No
sensitivity] button.
175
Other Settings and Adjustments
■ Full detection
(Maintenance and Setting Functions Full detection)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
When using the “Full Detection” function, which
detects the full state at the box for NG products or
pass products, this sets the target for full counting
from input of the box-full signal input until the
conveyor stops.
Pass * This is enabled only when “FULL” is set at “Input
BoxFull Target
NG port” and “Output port” in the “I/O Setting” screen.
Stops conveyor when pass product count
2 Advanced Operations
Pass
reaches set full count.
Stops conveyor when NG product count
NG
reaches set full count.
Set the time from the full detection signal on to the
Box full monitoring 5 seconds occurrence of an alarm. Set the time so that no
time (1 to 10 seconds) product overflows from the NG box before an alarm
occurs.
An alarm occurs at full detection and
3 Installation and Connection
176
Other Settings and Adjustments
Full Detection Input and Output
When boxes are installed at the weighed product classification outlet, products may not
be correctly classified or products may overflow if the boxes become full. Full detection
I/O avoids this problem.
1 Basic Operations
外部(ボックス)
External (box)
① 重量選別機
Checkweigher
② 外部(パトライト)
External
(Warning light)
満杯検出入力
Full detect input
2 Advanced Operations
満杯検出出力
Full detect output
"A070 Box FULL" display
「A070 ボックス FULL」表示
5s 1s 個数カウントリセット
Count reset alarm
アラーム表示解除
display released
The input signal logic can be reversed by changing the input logic setting.
177
Other Settings and Adjustments
■ NG rate
(Maintenance and Setting Functions NG rate)
Setting
Name Explanation
1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
Set whether NG rate alarm function available or not.
No The NG rate alarm is output when the NG rate in the
NG Rate
Yes NG rate batch exceeds the set value. Set the NG rate
(%) and NG rate batch at "Product settings”.
NG Rate Alarm Nonstop
Selects NG Alarm stop processing ON/OFF.
Processing Stop
2 Advanced Operations
Example: When the batch quantity for NG rate is 10 and NG rate is 30%.
If 3 (10 x 30%) or more faulty products are included in the latest 10 pieces, an
NG rate alarm occurs.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
OK NG OK OK OK OK OK NG OK OK NG OK NG NG
○ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ ○ ○ △ ○ △ △
2 NG products
NG2 個
3 NG products
NG3 個
4 Maintenance
2NG2
NG products
個
3 NG products
NG3 個
4 NG products
NG4 個
不良率 NG
NG Rate 出力 OFF
Alarm
Output ON
If a rate of faulty products exceeds the set NG rate prior to reaching the batch quantity for
NG rate after starting operation, NG rate alarm output turns on. At power-on, or if
operation is suspended, the previous faulty product data is cleared. This function does not
5 Appendix
178
Other Settings and Adjustments
Timing Chart (When
タイムチャート suspended due to an error)
(異常時停止の場合)
・測
■ 定
Measurement
(T1 to evaluation time)
(T1~判定時間) NG Rate Alarm
↓不良率 NG と判断Output
1 Basic Operations
OFF
■ Evaluated as NG
・不良率 NG 出力 ON
Rate Alarm
■ Motor-ON Output
OFF
・モータオン出力 ON
・ブザー出力
■ Buzzer output OFF
ON
Operating Recovery Key
復帰キー操作 CE
2 Advanced Operations
■ Counter preset
(Maintenance and Setting Functions Counter preset)
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Selects the counting target when “Counter preset”
used.
PASS
Preset Pattern ALL PASS Only pass products
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Enables and disables the product check function.
The product check function is used to correct the
4 Maintenance
179
Other Settings and Adjustments
■ NGBox door monitoring time
(Maintenance and Setting Functions Electronic locked NGBox setting)
Setting
Name Explanation
1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
This function is used to notify the alarm when the
unacceptable-product box that is installed to the
rejector is opened for the specified time or longer.
Yes
NGBox Lock Alarm can be released by the operation on the
No
screen. In addition, closing all of the
unacceptable-product boxes to be installed
automatically releases alarm.
This parameter is used to set a time for monitoring
2 Advanced Operations
■ Auto-limit setting
(Maintenance and Setting Functions Auto-limit setting)
3 Installation and Connection
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Sets the count to feed through products when using
the auto-limit setting while the conveyor is running.
20
Auto-limit count Statistics are counted because this operation is
(5 to 99)
performed while in the normal production state.
If a product is evaluated as NG, it is not counted.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
180
Other Settings and Adjustments
■ RJ check (optional)
(Maintenance and Setting Functions RJ Check Setting)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default:_)
Set how to generate the following RJ check error.
▪ Rejector operation error E015, A015
▪ OK not passed E031, A031
▪ NG product passed E032, A032
▪ NG product rejection error E033, A033
▪ OK product rejected E034, A034
▪ NG product rejection error E035, A035
2 Advanced Operations
▪ Non-evaluation rejecting E036, A036
▪ RJ3 acceptance path conveyance fail E081, A081
▪ RJ3 acceptance path conveyance fail E082, A082
▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ3 accept. path
E083, A083
▪ RJ1 reject path sort failure E084, A084
▪ RJ1 reject path sort failure E085, A085
▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ1 reject path
E086, A086
181
Other Settings and Adjustments
> User Information
This is to specify the user information.
1 Basic Operations
User
(Maint. and Setting Maintenance Information User Information User)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Display settings
(Control Panel Display settings)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Adjusts back light brightness.
3 Installation and Connection
4, 3, 2, 1, 0, -1,
Screen brightness
-2, -3, -4 The default "4" is the brightest setting.
Sets the time to turn off the screen light.
When it is set to 0, the screen will never turn off.
Back light out 0 to 30 (min)
To re-display the screen, touch the screen or press
the Home button.
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
4 Maintenance
182
Other Settings and Adjustments
1 Basic Operations
QWERTY screen ABCDEF screen
2 Advanced Operations
Device Information settings
(Maint. and Setting Device Information Device Information settings)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
0000
Line Name Sets "Line Name" to identify the checkweigher.
(up to 4 characters)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
183
Options and Peripheral Devices
Options and Peripheral Devices
1 Select the "Menu" screen "Maint. and Setting" "Unit/connected device set.”
"Signal tower / Buzzer" "Signal tower common Set”.
2 Advanced Operations
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
No Sets the presence of the signal tower or
Signal Tower
Yes buzzer.
3 Sets the number of lamps to 3.
Number of Lights
(0 to 3) For the buzzer, set Number of Lamps to 3.
4 Maintenance
Disabling buzzer sound and lamps Press the [//] button at the top of the screen.
184
Options and Peripheral Devices
3 Select the item to set in the "Sig. tower
settings" screen and press [Input]. Set
the Op method and Op Time by referring
to the table below.
1 Basic Operations
Event
When the "Event" box is pressed, the input screen is displayed.
2 Advanced Operations
Stop Conveyor stopped Disable Disable Disable Enable
Operation Conveyor ON Disable Disable Disable Enable
Ope.Check Operation check Disable Disable Disable Enable
Error Error occurred Disable Disable Disable Enable
Alarm occurrs and product is
Alarm Disable Disable Disable Enable
discharged in alarm direction.
OK OK evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
are used.
185
Options and Peripheral Devices
The settings specified in OUTP1 to OUTP3 of general I/O output can be used as a signal
tower event. OUTP1 to OUTP3 can be set in the I/O Output screen
Available events are shown in the table below.
1 Basic Operations
USB Memory-Related
Alarm
READY
NGBOX OPEN RJ1
NGBOX OPEN RJ2
NGBOX OPEN RJ4
NGBOX OPEN RJ5
MD Conveyor Mode
Output
4 Maintenance
Op method
When the "Op method" box is pressed, the input screen is displayed.
Op method Operation
Standard Operates as described in the event.
Pulse Operates during the Op Time.
Hold 1 Operates until the end of evaluation of the next product.
Hold 2 Operates until the Reset button on the screen is pressed to reset.
5 Appendix
186
Options and Peripheral Devices
Illumination method
When the level box of the tower is pressed, the input screen is displayed.
1 Basic Operations
Off Turns it off.
No change Does not affect the light.
On Turns it on.
Blink 1 Repeats short blinks.
Blink 2 Repeats long blinks.
Blink 3 Repeats short blinks with a break in between sets.
2 Advanced Operations
Beep method
When the top level box of the tower is pressed, the input screen is displayed.
187
Options and Peripheral Devices
■ Sequence change
Sets the lamp to highlight (give preference) at the upper tier.
1 Basic Operations
■ Delete event
Select the event and press the [Delete] button at the bottom of the screen.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
188
Options and Peripheral Devices
> Setting a Printer
This section describes the printer settings when the optional printer is installed.
1 Basic Operations
■ Setting a printer to use
Printer settings
(Menu → Maint. and Setting Unit/connected device set. Printer Printer
settings)
Setting
Name Description
(Default:_)
Sets printer disable or enable Data Printer or
2 Advanced Operations
commercially used printer.
Disable
Disable Not used
Excl. Use
Printer Excl. Use Optional Data Printer used
General 1
General 2 Commercially manufactured printer
General 1,
used. For the model that can be used,
General 2
consult Anritsu.
Output all product data during suspension. You cannot output the data during operation.
189
Options and Peripheral Devices
■ Settings for products other than print target products
Printer output settings
(Menu → Maint. and Setting Unit/connected device set. Printer Printer output
settings)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Normal
Print Direction Sets the print direction.
Reverse
No Sets whether or not to print a histogram.
Histogram Print
Yes A histogram is printed at batch statistics printing.
No Sets whether or not to print time. Individual printing
Time Print
Yes contents depend on the setting of “Individual Print”.
2 Advanced Operations
All
(PASS/UNDER/OVER).
Print only weights of +NG, -NG, MDNG,
Only NG
EXNG and Dbl. Prod products.
Prints only weights and MD evaluation
MDNG value of MDNG products but does not
print for separate MD.
Inputs individual product printing cycle (up to four
digits [0 to 9999]).
For the individual product printing cycle, specify the
interval for individual product printing in product
counts. At this time, make sure to specify a value
less than that specified for “Batch Print Cycle”.
1 Individual statistics are not printed if a value equal to
4 Maintenance
Each Print Cycle or greater than that specified for “Batch Print Cycle”
(0 to 9999)
is specified.
(If the measurement speed is 300 ppm or more,
specify 2 or more for the individual product printing
cycle.)
When 0 is specified, individual product printing is not
performed.
Specifies batch printing cycle (up to four digits [0 to
9999]).
0 For the batch printing cycle, specify the batch printing
Batch Print Cycle
(0 to 9999) interval in batch counts.
5 Appendix
190
Options and Peripheral Devices
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Sets ON/OFF for the function that automatically
prints operation check results at the end of an
Print at Operation No operation check.
1 Basic Operations
Check End Yes
Operation Check …(Accuracy Check and Eva/RJ
Confirmation)
Print stats at No Specifys whether to print statistical data at the end of
production end Yes production when smart guide is being used.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
Normal Reverse
191
Options and Peripheral Devices
■ Print contents and format
The checkweigher can print the following data with the optional printer installed.
192
Options and Peripheral Devices
(All products statistics)
Statistics start time
(Time when the first product
was measured after the P001=== G.TOTAL ==== ALL
statistics data was cleared.) Start 2011-11-01 15:30
End 2011-11-01 18:30 Statistics end time
1 Basic Operations
Indicates how many times a Product name ---- Confectionery
batch measurement has been Lot No. --- BCD1234
performed since the start of Batch 2
Any products other than the
statistics. -NG products 4.9% 2
pass products are not printed
PASS products 87.8% 36 when pass product statistics
Metal NG count +NG products 7.3% 3 is set.
MDNG 0.0% 0
External NG count
EXNG 0.0% 0 MDNG, EXNG, EXNG2, and
EXNG2 0.0% 0 D-Prod. are not printed if they
D-Prod. 0.0% 0 are excluded from statistics.
Total count 41 Total count includes the
2 Advanced Operations
Indicates the number of number of D-Prod. products
No. of products 41 when double product print is
products subject to statistics.
Total weight 1.79716 kg set.
Mean 43.8332 g
Only the pass products are
subject to statistics for pass
Standard deviation 9.3374 g The statistic contents to be
product statistics. printed can be selected by
External NG products are Dispersion 46.40 g Statistics Print Select on the
excluded from statistics even Maximum value 49.78 g Basic Statistics Setting screen,
for all product statistics. Minimum value 3.38 g which is displayed by selecting
“Menu” “Stats Control”
“Basic Statistics Setting”.
Reference value-- 46.00 g All Data: Dispersion range,
Prints the tare weight when Lower limit ------ -4.00 g maximum weight,
Upper limit ------ 4.00 g
193
Options and Peripheral Devices
Batch Statistics Printing
Printing of statistics results at every predetermined number of products or every
predetermined time is called batch statistics printing.
The printed contents vary by the parameter settings on the Printer output setting screen,
1 Basic Operations
--------------------------------------
194
Options and Peripheral Devices
Individual Print
Individual Print is used to print individual data of product.
In the example below, “46.05” next to “1” at the top left indicates the first data item of the
batch, followed by odd numbers (3, 5, 7,…). “46.08” to the right is the second data item,
1 Basic Operations
followed by even numbers (4, 6, 8,…).
(All)
The measurement time is printed
Data of odd-numbered when Time Print is set to “Yes”.
products The measurement time is not
2011-05-17 16:43:34
printed when the products are
1 46.05+M 46.08 measured at the same time.
Note: Only the pass 3 46.60E 46.03
products are
printed when
2011-05-17 16:44:03
5 110.26+* -***.** W
2 Advanced Operations
pass products Data of even-numbered products
t ti ti i t 7 -***.** W +***.**
9 46.31e 43.89-*
The meanings of the characters and symbols printed to the right of the numeric data are
as shown below.
(Only NG)
The time when an NG
product is measured is
Product No. 2011-11-17 13:44:44 printed when Time Print is
P001 Snacks set to “Yes”.
Serial number (1 to 9999) 1 43.11-*
The number restarts from 2011-11-17 14:06:51 Product
1 when it exceeds 9999 P001 Snacks
2 50.34+*
4 Maintenance
・・・
2011-11-17 15:24:18
P005 Candies
3 -***.** W
5 Appendix
195
Options and Peripheral Devices
(Only MDNG)
The time when an MDNG
product is measured is
Product No. printed when Time Print is
2011-11-17 13:44:44
set to “Yes”.
P099 Snacks
1 Basic Operations
P099 Snacks
Product
Serial number(1 to 9999) 1 MDNG 58.725g
The number restarts from ML1 4.86/ 5.0 Indicates the effect value measured
1 when it exceeds 9999
ML2 2.87/ 5.0 by the metal detector. The numeric
ML3 2.87/ 5.0 value on the right of the slash (/) is
the metal evaluation limit.
ML4 2.87/ 5.0
Check metal contamination
ML1: Evaluation value
3 Installation and Connection
196
Options and Peripheral Devices
Operation Check Print
(Eva.RJ Confirmation/Procedure Fixed)
Product No.
Product
===Eva/RJ Confirmation===
1 Basic Operations
Access level of the user No.001 Confectionery
who performed the
Eval/RJ check
2011-11-01 11:30:21 Time when the Eval/RJ
Access level 1b check was performed
Individual data Result OK Pass/fail result of the
Indicates the evaluation 1 [ OK] OK 46.34 g Eval/RJ check
reference value and result for Fe/SUS 0.57 Ext 1.02
each evaluation. 2 [ MDNG] MDNG
The evaluation reference can
Fe/SUS 88.38 Ext 1.35 Indicates the effect value
be set by selecting “Menu” measured by the metal
“Operation Check” “Eval. & 3 [ MDNG] MDNG
Fe/SUS 86.40 Ext 1.34 detector. The printed
RJ check settings”. contents depend on the
evaluation mode selected.
2 Advanced Operations
Characters in [ ] indicates Reference value ---- 46.00 g
evaluation reference Lower limit --------- 49.00 g
while those out of [ ] Upper limit ---------- 43.00 g
indicates evaluation Fe/SUS --------------- 5.0
result. Ext -------------------- 5.0 Setting values for evaluation
Printed when using metal Test pieces
detector. Size Fe φ 2.0
Indicates the limit value to
Size SUS φ 2.0 evaluate metal NG. The
contents changes based
======================= on the selected
"evaluation mode".
197
Options and Peripheral Devices
(Eva.RJ Confirmation/Procedure Fixed)
Product No. Product
===Eva/RJ Confirmation===
Access level of the user No.001 Confectionery
who performed the Eval/RJ 2011-11-01 11:30:21
1 Basic Operations
“Operation Check” “Eval. & ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) for ML2 side
RJ check settings”. ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) ML3: Evaluation value
3 [MDNG]MDNG for ML3 side
Characters in [ ] ML1 (14.86/ 5.0 ) ML4: Evaluation value
indicates evaluation ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) for ML4 side
reference while those ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) Check missing product
out of [ ] indicates ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) ML1: Evaluation value
evaluation result.
for ML1 side
Reference value - 46.00 g
Lower limit ---- 49.00 g
Upper limit ---- 43.00 g
Test pieces Setting values for evaluation
3 Installation and Connection
198
Options and Peripheral Devices
(Accuracy Check)
Product No. Product
======Accuracy check=====
Access level of the No.001 Confectionery
user who performed
2011-11-01 11:30:21
1 Basic Operations
the accuracy check
Access level 1b Time when the accuracy
Result OK check was performed
Allowable accuracy 3.00 g Pass/fail result of the
Meas. Accuracy 0.2364 g accuracy check
Product measurement count Count 10
Weight of master product Master 46.44 g
Mean value X-bar 46.3200 g
Standard deviation S 0.0388 g
Range R 0.12 g
Maximum value Max 46.38 g
Minimum value Min 46.26 g
2 Advanced Operations
1 46.30 g
2 46.38 g
3 46.34 g
4 46.32 g
Measured data of 5 46.36 g
products for the number of
6 46.34 g
times of measurement
7 46.26 g
8 46.32 g
9 46.32 g
10 46.26 g
=======================
199
Options and Peripheral Devices
Check Mode Print
Product
1 Basic Operations
Product No.
Time when shifting to the
P001 Check Mode check mode screen.
Start 2013-08-12 11:05:51
[OK ] 1234.56 g
Evaluation result
Fe ( 4.86/ 5.0 ) Indicates the effect value
SUS ( 2.87/ 5.0 ) measured by the metal
Individual data [MDNG ] 1234.56 g detector. The printed
contents depend on the
Indicates the evaluation Fe ( 5.17/ 5.0 ) evaluation mode selected.
reference value and result SUS ( 2.08/ 5.0)
for each evaluation. The numeric value on the
[MDNG ] 1234.56 g right of the slash (/) is the
2 Advanced Operations
Product
Product No.
Time when shifting to the check
No.001 Check Mode mode screen.
3 Installation and Connection
200
Options and Peripheral Devices
> Using Smart Measurement Function (SMF)
■ SMF (optional)
If the intervals between fed products are small as in a high-speed line, a product may be
1 Basic Operations
put on the weigh conveyor before the previous measurement is completed. In this case, a
conventional checkweigher cannot measure the weight of each product correctly, so both
products are rejected as products unable to be measured.
This function improves the yield by automatically adjusting measurement conditions so
that the weight of each product can be measured when two products are put on the weigh
conveyor.
When two products are put on the weigh conveyor, the weight of each product can be
2 Advanced Operations
measured by automatically shortening the measurement time set previously. Decreasing
the limit range of the upper and lower limits according to the shortened time can prevent
+NG and -NG products from being evaluated as PASS products.
■ Using SMF
201
Options and Peripheral Devices
■ SMF Info screen
This screen displays the improvements in productivity caused by SMF.
The displayed improvement of the yield is based on a comparison with the values when
this function is not used.
1 Basic Operations
In the "Menu" screen, select "Stats Control" "SMF info screen" to display this screen.
202
Options and Peripheral Devices
> Setting Rejector
This is to make detailed settings for the rejector.
1 Basic Operations
Common set of RJ
(Maintenance and Setting Unit/connected device set. Rejector Common set
of RJ)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
39 m/min
RJ Conveyor Speed Sets the conveyor speed of the rejector.
(5 to 120)
2 Advanced Operations
RJ Conveyor Speed 39 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed to high.
(High) (5 to 120)
RJ Conveyor Speed 39 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed to low.
(Low) (5 to 120)
RJ belt speed detail 39.0 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed to high.
(High) (5 to 120.0)
RJ belt speed detail 39.0 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed to low.
(Low) (5 to 120.0)
This function detects product intervals resulting in
203
Options and Peripheral Devices
RJ Direction Settings
(Maintenance and Setting Unit/connected device set. Rejector RJ Direction
Settings)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default:_)
Automatically set by RJ model.
This sets the gate standby position during operation
to PASS or NG.
* This function is enabled when the RJ output type
OK is "Pulse" and it is ignored when the RJ output
No Prod. Dir. type is "Hold”.
NG
2 Advanced Operations
D-Prod.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5 Length Exceeded) rejection direction.
Rejects the products forcibly in the specified
direction under the following conditions.
▪ Before the start of rejection of correctly evaluated
products since the machine starts running
RJ1,
▪ During auto-setting
Forced RJ2, RJ3,
▪ During HIS settings
RJ4, RJ5
▪ During the auto-limit (from the stop of running to
the start of rejection
5 Appendix
204
Options and Peripheral Devices
▪ The initial setting of the rejection direction varies depending on the connected rejector.
▪ When the rejection direction is set to Stop, the product may flow on the conveyor to the
downstream without stopping.
1 Basic Operations
▪ D-Prod is the status in which the next product is placed on the weighing conveyor while the
weight of the previous product is being measured during rejection by weight.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
205
Options and Peripheral Devices
■ Rejection direction
RJ1
RJ3 RJ3
Flow RJ1 RJ5 Flow
5-way classification (option) (Top view)
RJ direction RJ direction
RJ5 RJ1
RJ4 RJ2
RJ3 RJ3
2 Advanced Operations
Flow
RJ1
Air jet (top view)
RJ direction
RJ3
Flow
Set directions for each of the following: –NG, OK, +NG, ALARM, MDNG, EXNG, EXNG2,
DBL P.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
206
Options and Peripheral Devices
■ RJ test mode
The operations of the rejector can be checked.
▪ In this mode, evaluation and rejection are not performed when a normal product is fed through.
1 Basic Operations
▪ Be sure to stop the operation before using this feature.
2 Advanced Operations
2 Select the "Above content acknowledged"
check box and then tap [Operate].
4 Maintenance
207
Options and Peripheral Devices
5 Tap the [Stop] button to exit RJ test
mode.
1 Basic Operations
■ Evaluation Priority
When several NG statuses occur simultaneously, the priority rank is as follows:
優先順位
Rank
2 Advanced Operations
優先度が高い
Priority High 1 At アラーム判定(異常発生時)
error occurrence (ALARM)
2 金属 NG 判定
2 MDNG
3 外部 NG2
3 External 判定
NG2 (EXNG2)
4 外部 NG
4 External 判定
NG (EXNG)
5 2 個乗り判定
5 Double product (DBL P.)
6 アラーム判定(アラーム発生時)
6 Alarm evaluation (at alarm)
7 質量判定(軽量・過量)
7 Weight evaluation (-NG, +NG)
優先度が低い
Priority Low 8
8 Pass product in EXNGNG
良品振分用外部 判定SPS)
(EXNG:
9 質量判定(正量)
9 Weight evaluation (PASS)
3 Installation and Connection
208
Other Useful Functions
Other Useful Functions
1 Basic Operations
For equipment with the standard specifications, Smart Guide is set by default. To enable
Smart Guide after disabling it, follow the instructions below.
2 Advanced Operations
2 Select "Standard", and press [OK].
After the setting is changed from "No" to "Standard" as shown above, press the [Home]
button to display the Smart Guide initial screen. Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify the settings.
209
Other Useful Functions
■ Displaying a daily report
Information about production performed by using the Smart Guide can be displayed on
the Smart Guide in the form of a daily report.
The screen can be switched to the daily report screen by tapping the [Display Daily
1 Basic Operations
completed successfully.
■ If production was not performed even
after the product type was changed, that
product type is not recorded in the daily
report.
(Example) No. 5 on the screen on the right
Symbols Description
O Operation check successful
X Operation check failed
Blank Not implemented
- Canceled (stopped)
* Forcibly terminated
5 Appendix
210
Other Useful Functions
■ Selecting the daily report to display
The daily report to display on the daily report screen can be selected by tapping the
[Select Daily Report] button at the bottom of the daily report screen.
Changing the daily report to display on the
1 Basic Operations
daily report selection screen does not change
the manufacture date or manufacture unit
selected on the "Phase 1" screen of the
Smart Guide.
The latest 200 daily reports can be displayed.
2 Advanced Operations
The data of the daily report showing the information of the selected manufacture date and
manufacture unit can be saved to a USB flash drive by tapping the [Save to USB] button
on the bottom of the daily report screen. The daily report data is recorded in a file called
"HDR_△△.csv" in the HIST folder.
Data is recorded to the USB flash drive in CSV format in the following order, with each
item delimited by a comma.
Item Remarks
ID Code History Type [4]
211
Other Useful Functions
Item Remarks
Pre-production The name of the user who performed the pre-production operation
Operation Check User check (only available when the optional user management feature is
Name used)
1 Basic Operations
212
Other Useful Functions
▪ The forcible termination can be performed by the authorized users assigned in the “Set Access
Authority” setting.
▪ The forcible termination can be performed any time during smart guide operation. However,
1 Basic Operations
when the conveyor is running, the display screen does not change and only the message is
displayed to indicate that the forcible termination is executed once the conveyor stops.
▪ Statistics from the start of work to forcible termination are cleared once the screen is moved to
[1. Work before commencing operations] in the Smart Guide and the manufacture date and
manufacture unit are selected.
2 Advanced Operations
and reference weight values of registered products are displayed.
▪ The following marks are displayed to indicate the setting status of each product.
Mark Description
The inspection can be performed.
The minimum settings required for the inspection are completed.
Not registered.
The inspection cannot be performed since the product registration is not completed.
For the products with “” or “?” displayed, perform inspection after product registration.
4 Maintenance
P. 35 Registering a New Product
5 products/screen 8 products/screen
213
Other Useful Functions
■ To change the product for production, select the product to change and press [Prod.
Chg.].
■ The "Show product list" is also displayed when the "Product" area is pressed in the
1 Basic Operations
"General" screen.
214
Other Useful Functions
2 When [Yes] is pressed, only the statistics
related to the currently selected product
are cleared.
1 Basic Operations
This example is in the "General" screen,
but the statistics data is cleared in other
screens such as "Histogram" and
"Enlarge bar" simultaneously.
To clear the statistics of all the recorded products, select "Clear all product Stats." and
press [Yes].
The statistics of all products cannot be cleared from the screen or IO during operation.
2 Advanced Operations
> Setting All Products
This feature is used when specifying parameters of all products at once.
This feature improves the parameter setting efficiency when there are a lot of registered
products.
215
Other Useful Functions
3 Open the screen that contains the
parameter to be set for all products, enter
the value to be changed, and then press
[OK].
1 Basic Operations
216
Other Useful Functions
> Customizing the Items Displayed in Submenu
The submenus displayed by pressing a button on the bottom of the “Home” screen can be
customized. This feature is used to reduce the items displayed on the submenu.
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
The items on the submenu that can be customized
4 Maintenance
217
Other Useful Functions
■ Showing the hidden items
To show the hidden submenu items, select
the blank field and then press [Enter]. When
the menu selection screen is displayed,
1 Basic Operations
218
Other Useful Functions
> Using Conveyor Mode
If you do not perform weight measurement by product, set “CW Conveyor mode” to “Yes”.
If you do not perform metal detection by product, set “MD Conveyor mode” to “Yes”.
1 Basic Operations
When the conveyor mode is set to [Yes], the status of the equipment is as follows:
In CW conveyor mode (only the metal detector is used):
■ The Start button blinks during operation.
■ "-" will be shown in all the weight display and "OK" (green) will be shown in evaluation.
Product counting and weight data capture will not be performed.
■ For serial measured output and individual print, "0 g" will be output.
■ Products on the conveyor are not counted.
2 Advanced Operations
■ "CW Dbl. Product" will be ignored.
■ Auto calculation of measurement timing for weight measurement will not be performed.
Timing to capture EXNG and MDNG will automatically be set.
■ Enable “Yes (Forced motor ON)” setting when the sorting capability (processing
capability per minute) is high.
press [Input].
219
Other Useful Functions
■ Do not feed a product that has a weight exceeding the upper limit of the weighing range if you
set the CW conveyor mode. The weighing unit might be broken due to overload.
■ The conveyor belt speed does not change when the conveyor mode is changed from Yes to
1 Basic Operations
No.
■ In the MD conveyor mode, be careful that products are fed through downstream without
checking metal contamination and missing products.
■ When the conveyor mode is set to [Yes (Force Motor ON)], serial measured value output and
individual printing are not performed. Counting and RJ of MDNG, EXNG, EXNG2, MD Prod.
Length Alarm, and MD Dbl.Prod are also not performed.
When "History" is pressed in the "Menu" screen, past equipment state and production
state are displayed.
Up to 1000 past events can be recorded, such as occurrences of NG products and
operation histories.
selected error or alarm and display the operation history. The list of occurrence dates can
also be checked.
The number displayed on this screen is the result of counting the events in the operating
history.
Please note that this number might differ from the number recorded in the alarm history.
5 Appendix
220
Other Useful Functions
■ Ope. history
The operation history is displayed chronologically. The events shown in the operation
history include power-on, access level change, alarm occurrence and clearance, product
change, and other items. Select one of the events and tap [Info] to display a narrowed
1 Basic Operations
down history.
Tap [Expanded] to cancel the narrowed-down display.
■ Param. History
The target product No., parameter type, and details of change appear chronologically
every time a parameter is changed.
2 Advanced Operations
■ NG history
NG histories are displayed in chronological order with the product name and description
of NG. Among NG products, only MDNG and EXNG products are displayed.
+NG and –NG products are not covered.To save data to the USB memory, press [Save].
■ Alarm History
Histories of error and alarm occurrences are displayed in chronological order. “No.” shows
4 Maintenance
221
Other Useful Functions
■ Saving history
To save data, press [Save], select the data
(Operation History / Parameter History / NG
History / Operation Check History/ Alarm
1 Basic Operations
■ Clearing history
For "NG History" and "Operation Check History”, all data can be cleared by pressing the
[Fn] button on the button right of the screen.
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
222
Other Useful Functions
> Setting Access Level By Function
Unexpected parameter changes can be prevented by setting an access level for each
function.
1 Basic Operations
1 In the "Menu" screen, select "Maint. and
Setting" "Security and rules" "Set
Access Authority" to open the following
screen.
2 Advanced Operations
are displayed.
Select the function to set and press
[Input] to display the setting screen.
The table below shows the operational limitations that can be specified for each item.
Item Description
4 Maintenance
223
Other Useful Functions
Item Description
Forcible Limits the operation to stop the operation according to the smart
termination guide halfway through.
Limits the operation for lot number change.
1 Basic Operations
224
Other Useful Functions
> Registering Products Using Another Auto Setting Method
Use this when measuring a product to which auto settings have been applied (the
1 Basic Operations
properties are already known) or when changing a sensitivity mode determined by the full
automatic method.
2 Advanced Operations
product for evaluating properties by specifying the product properties in advance.
Merits: The number of times the master product needs to be fed to the
checkweigher is decreased.
Demerits: The acquired sensitivity may not be optimal if an appropriate property is
not specified. Difference in devices and installation environments may
not be considered.
4 Maintenance
225
Other Useful Functions
■ Specify Sens. Mode
A sensitivity mode can be automatically set by selecting “Specify Sens. Mode”.
Use this only when you have automatically set the same product with another product
number or another device that is the same model, and you know the sensitivity mode.
1 Basic Operations
For unregistered products, select the same setting as that of the sensitivity mode
determined by the other product number or other device that is the same model.
For registered products, the current setting is already selected.
5 Appendix
226
Other Useful Functions
3 Perform auto setting.
P. 44 Registering a New Product - step 18
1 Basic Operations
▼ Metal contamination check
2 Advanced Operations
detecting sensitivity are displayed. Press
[Completed] to apply the new settings.
Press [Cancel] if you do not want to apply
the results of the auto setting.
The value of the estimated detection sensitivity is a rough indication of the test piece that can be
detected and is not a guaranteed value. Be sure to check the detection sensitivity after
performing the auto settings.
When auto setting finishes, the determined sensitivity mode and the estimated
detecting sensitivity are displayed. Press [Completed] to apply the new settings. Press
[Cancel] if you do not want to apply the results of auto setting.
The selection criteria for the sensitivity mode are complex, and specialized knowledge is
required for determining the sensitivity mode of products to which auto setting has not been
performed and changing the sensitivity mode determined by auto setting. Perform the normal
auto setting in [Full-auto (recommended)].
5 Appendix
Contact an Anritsu or its distributor for service if you need to manually specify the sensitivity
mode to adjust the detection sensitivity, and do not perform the specification by yourself.
227
Other Useful Functions
■ Specify prod. Type
The product properties can be automatically set by selecting [Specify prod. Type] if the
product properties are those shown in the following table.
However, this method cannot be used to check missing products.
1 Basic Operations
228
Other Useful Functions
3 Perform auto setting.
P. 44 Registering a New Product - step 18
1 Basic Operations
Master products are fed 5 times when the
“Specify product property.” is selected
(15 times for full automatic mode)
The value of the estimated detection sensitivity is a rough indication of the test piece that can be
detected and is not a guaranteed value. Be sure to check the detection sensitivity after
performing the auto settings.
2 Advanced Operations
When auto setting finishes, the
determined sensitivity mode and the
estimated detecting sensitivity are
displayed. Press [Completed] to apply
the new settings. Press [Cancel] if you do
not want to apply the results of the auto
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
229
Other Useful Functions
> Correcting the Phase based on Characteristic Change (product check function)
The product check function corrects the phase of the metal detector immediately before
starting operation. This function is used only if the type of product is wet.
1 Basic Operations
If the phase of the metal detector deviates from the optimum setting value due to a reason
such as changes in the product or device temperature, the metal detection signal
fluctuates greatly and may lead to metal NG evaluation even if the product contains no
metal contamination. Use this function to suppress a false detection due to phase
dispersion by feeding the master product at the start of operation to correct the phase of
the metal detector.
2 Advanced Operations
▪ As a missing product check is not affected by temperature changes, the product check
function is not required.
▪ As dry products ( P. 228) are not prone to phase shifting, the product check function is not
required.
▪ The number of master products fed through during a product check is excluded from the
statistics.
P. 66 Product check
5 Appendix
230
Other Useful Functions
■ How to use a product check
1 If a product matches the product check
conditions, press the [Start] button to
display the data collection screen shown
1 Basic Operations
to the right.
2 Advanced Operations
message “Completed normally” is
displayed. Press the [Start] button to start
production.
231
Other Useful Functions
If "Bulk" is specified and the processing does not advance from the Data collection screen even
after a product is fed through several times, specify a smaller value for the settings below. The
effective value of a product that is fed through for a product check might be smaller than the value
1 Basic Operations
specified by auto-setting.
▪ Prod. Detection level (Fe), Prod. Detection level (SUS)
▪ Prod. Detection level (ML1), Prod. Detection level (ML2), Prod. Detection level
(ML3), Prod. Detection level (ML4)
P. 66 Product check
* The default value is 0.8. Do not specify a smaller value. Adjust the setting value so that
detection is performed only when a product is fed through.
If the problem is not resolved even after performing the adjustment described above, perform
2 Advanced Operations
auto-setting using the procedure below and then perform a product check again.
(1) Select "Menu", "Adjust registered products", and "Auto-set" to open the Auto-set screen.
(2) Select "Make auto setting by using current settings" to perform auto-setting.
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
232
Other Useful Functions
> Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity
The evaluation reference value for the metal contamination (or missing products) check
are automatically determined by the auto setting function.
1 Basic Operations
Metal contamination check: Evaluation limit magnification 5.0 (MDNG resulted if the effect
value is more than 5 times that of the master product)
Missing product check: Evaluation limit magnification 0.7 (missing product NG resulted if
the effect value is 70% or less than that of the master product)
You can use these settings under normal conditions. For further stability or sensitivity,
change the metal detection sensitivity by using the following procedure.
After you have changed the metal detection sensitivity, be sure to check the detection
2 Advanced Operations
performance of the control sensitivity reference test piece (or the reference contaminants).
You can restrict the access level. The access level is set to 1b or higher at factory shipment.
P. 223 Setting Access Level By Function
4 Maintenance
By tapping the [Display] button, the screens to adjust the detection sensitivity can be
switched.
1: Sensitivity Adjustment screen
2: Sensitivity Adjustment 2 screen
3: Product effect monitor screen
4: Noise monitor screen
There are two sensitivity adjustment screens: the "Sensitivity Adjustment" screen and the
"Sensitivity Adjustment 2" screen.
5 Appendix
233
Other Useful Functions
■ Sensitivity Adjustment screen (for a metal contamination check)
You can adjust the detection limit by checking the metal effect value on the bar graph. At
the same time, you can check the estimated detection sensitivity after changing the
setting.
1 Basic Operations
Upper:
2 Advanced Operations
Fe detection sensitivity*
Sens mode
Shows the determined
mode by Auto-set.
Lower:
SUS detection sensitivity* Effect value display bar
Shows the effect value
Blue line in real-time.
3 Installation and Connection
* Ext (Effect value display bar intended contaminants other than Fe and SUS) may be
displayed. Ext is detected by either the circuit of Fe or SUS.
5 Appendix
234
Other Useful Functions
1 Basic Operations
[T]: Displayed for products for which Effect value indicator
autotracking is used. Indicates the
[P]: Displayed for products for which the real-time effect Estimat detection
product check function is used. values. sensitivity
Sensitivity mode
(Displays the
predetermined
Inverted triangle
auto-setting values.)
(▽)
2 Advanced Operations
ML1 detection sensitivity Indicates the
235
Other Useful Functions
■ Changing the detection sensitivity (for a metal contamination check)
▪ To decrease the detection sensitivity
Increase the evaluation limit magnification if the effect of a product that has no metal
contaminant exceeds the evaluation limit due to a wide variety of effect of the product
1 Basic Operations
effect value will be a third of the evaluation limit and may not exceed a half of
the maximum evaluation limit.
1 Feed master products several times and check the maximum deflection of the
detection sensitivity.
magnification and repeat steps 1 and 2 until the deflection falls within 2 scales.
Increasing the deflection of the detection sensitivity display increases the detection sensitivity.
However, this increases the possibility of false detection due to the shape of the product and the
differences in components.
3 Attach a test piece (or contaminant) to the master product, feed it through several
4 Maintenance
4 Attach a test piece (or contaminant) to different positions on the product and adjust the
evaluation limit magnification to ensure NG detections for any position.
5 Feed master products several times and make sure that NG is not detected. If the
master product is evaluated as NG, return to step 2 and make adjustments.
If a false detection occurs when you feed only the master product, Fe and SUS test pieces as
5 Appendix
236
Other Useful Functions
■ Changing the detection sensitivity (for a missing product check)
Although the setting screen differs, the procedure to adjust the detection sensitivity of a
missing product check is the same as that of an adjustment for a metal contamination
check. See the following figure for the main differences.
1 Basic Operations
< button > button
Press to increase the detection Press to decrease the detection
sensitivity (the evaluation limit sensitivity (the evaluation limit
magnification increases). magnification decreases).
2 Advanced Operations
Common bar graph
to adjust (Fe/SUS)
Stabilization index R
(fixed value)
237
Other Useful Functions
1 Feed master products several times and check the maximum deflection of the
detection sensitivity.
If the deflection is within 2 red scales, decrease the value of the evaluation limit
magnification and repeat it until the deflection reaches 3 red scales or more.
4 Change the orientation to feed the missing product (NG sample) and adjust the
evaluation limit magnification to ensure NG detections at any orientation.
2 Advanced Operations
5 Feed the master product several times and make sure that NG is not detected.
If the master product is evaluated as NG, return to step 2 and make adjustments.
3 Installation and Connection
If a false detection occurs when you feed the master product only, a missing product check
cannot be performed.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
238
Other Useful Functions
■ Sensitivity Adjustment 2 screen (for a metal contamination check)
1 Basic Operations
Latest: Displays the latest item only.
Latest 10: Displays latest 10 items. automatically) Increases the evaluation limit
magnification value (the detection
Left: Right: sensitivity decreases).
Fe detection sensitivity* SUS detection sensitivity*
Evaluation limit
magnification value
Tap this to directly input
Indicates the values.
relative
2 Advanced Operations
evaluation limit ˅ button
position. Lowers the evaluation limit
If this line is magnification value (the
exceeded, the detection sensitivity
product is increases).
evaluated as NG.
The screen is switched Indicates the effect value of the last-inspected product.
Bulk type products:
Performs auto-setting.
Packaged type products:
Indicates the effect values of the latest 10 products.
Bulk type products:
The maximum values of the previous 9 products every 10 seconds
and the maximum value of the latest product every 10 seconds are
indicated by the white frame, and the changing values updated in
real time are indicated by the green part.
5 Appendix
* Ext (effect value display bar for metal contaminant other than Fe and SUS) may be
displayed. Ext can be detected by the Fe or SUS circuit.
239
Other Useful Functions
and ML2.
ML3/ML4 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity for ML3
˄ button
and ML4.
Increases the evaluation limit
magnification value (the
Estimated detection detection sensitivity
sensitivity decreases).
Evaluation limit
2 Advanced Operations
240
Other Useful Functions
■ Sensitivity Adjustment 2 screen (for a missing product check)
˄ button
1 Basic Operations
Latest/Latest 10 tab Stabilization index R Increases the evaluation limit
Latest: Displays the latest item only. (fixed value) magnification value (the detection
Latest 10: Displays latest 10 items. sensitivity increases).
Evaluation limit
Indicates the magnification value
relative Tap this to directly input
evaluation limit values.
2 Advanced Operations
position.
If the value falls ˅ button
below the line, Lowers the evaluation limit
the product is magnification value (the
evaluated as detection sensitivity
NG. decreases).
Performs auto-setting.
Indicates the effect values of the latest 10 products.
5 Appendix
241
Other Useful Functions
˄ button
Increases the evaluation limit
magnification value (the detection Stabilization index R
1 Basic Operations
Evaluation limit
magnification value
Tap this to directly input
Indicates the values.
relative
evaluation limit
position. ˅ button
If the value falls Lowers the evaluation
2 Advanced Operations
> Chronologically Viewing the Effect Value of the Product (Product effect monitor)
The value of effect from products and metal contaminants can be checked by viewing the
effect value history of the last 100 weighed products on the Product effect monitor screen.
The detection sensitivity can also be changed from this screen.
However, the screen displays the value affected during measurement when metal 3 (for a
product that does not block the photocell) is selected.
Tap the [Adjust sensitivity.] button on the "Basic display" screen and then select 3 of
“Display”.
You can also directly tap the metal detection level bar and then select 3 of “Display”.
242
Other Useful Functions
■ Description of the Product effect monitor screen
(for a metal contamination check)
1 Basic Operations
^ button
White horizontal line Increases the evaluation limit Evaluation limit magnification
Indicates the relative position of magnification (the detection sensitivity Press here to enter a numeric
the evaluation limit. decreases). value directly.
2 Advanced Operations
Lower: SUS detection sensitivity
* Ext (Effect value display bar intended contaminants other than Fe and SUS) may be
displayed. Ext is detected by either the circuit of Fe or SUS.
5 Appendix
243
Other Useful Functions
White horizontal
line
Indicates the
relative position Evaluation limit
v button
Decreases the
White vertical dotted line evaluation limit
Indicates the point where the magnification (the
[Clear] button
detection sensitivity (detection detection sensitivity
Clears the display of
limit magnification) is changed. increases).
all effect values.
3 Installation and Connection
244
Other Useful Functions
■ Description of the Product effect monitor screen (for a missing product check)
^ button v button
1 Basic Operations
Increase the evaluation limit magnification (the Decrease the evaluation limit magnification (the
detection sensitivity increases). detection sensitivity decreases).
2 Advanced Operations
Effect value display
Green bars indicated no missing products, and red
bars indicate missing product NG.
4 Maintenance
245
Other Useful Functions
> Checking the Effects such as External Noise (Noise monitor)
You can view metal detecting signals in real-time on the Noise monitor screen to check
whether disturbance noise is present and the value of effect from products and metal
1 Basic Operations
contaminants. The detection sensitivity can also be changed from this screen.
■ Differences between the Noise monitor screen and the Product effect monitor
screen
The Noise monitor screen displays the effect value from the metal detected by the metal
detector head even when the system is paused or when products are not being fed. This
function is useful to monitor the noise level from the surrounding area, which might cause
a false detection, and check the value of effect from a product that does not block the
2 Advanced Operations
photocell.
246
Other Useful Functions
■ Description of the Noise monitor screen
Although the figure below shows a screen for a metal contamination check, the screen
display for a missing product check is the same except that a common bar graph to adjust
1 Basic Operations
(Fe and SUS) is displayed.
White horizontal line Evaluation limit magnification and evaluation limit adjust buttons
Indicates the relative position of * Same function as that on the Product effect monitor screen
the evaluation limit. ( P. 243).
2 Advanced Operations
Upper: Fe detection sensitivity
[Stop] button
Temporary stops updating of effect value history display and fixes the display. Press this button again to
release stopping of the effect value display update (the effect values of the products that have been fed
while updating is stopped are displayed at once).
* Ext (Effect value display bar intended contaminants other than Fe and SUS) may be
displayed. Ext is detected by either the circuit of Fe or SUS.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
247
Other Useful Functions
[Stop] button
Temporary stops updating of effect value history display and fixes the display. Press this button again to
release stopping of the effect value display update (the effect values of the products that have been fed
while updating is stopped are displayed at once).
Although the figure below shows a screen for a metal contamination check, the screen
display for a missing product check is the same except that a common bar graph to adjust
(ML1) is displayed.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
248
Other Useful Functions
> Using HIS Setting Function
The HIS setting function increases the detection probability by registering the properties
of OK products and NG products into the metal detector and automatically specifying the
1 Basic Operations
settings suited for the test pieces to be detected. The target metal can be detected with
higher probability by performing the HIS setting function after auto-setting.
Be sure to prepare the following before executing the HIS setting function.
If an inspection product does not interrupt the photocell axis, interrupt it by hand when
the product reaches the detector head.
Usually, place NG products so that the test piece passes around the center of detector
head, where the detection probability becomes lowest, in order to increase the
2 Advanced Operations
detection probability for metal contaminants at any position in inspected products.
The detection sensitivity can be increased by performing the HIS setting several times.
The HIS setting function might not always increase the detection probability for any metal.
The detection results might be the same as those after auto-setting, depending on the type of
the inspection products (dimensions, shape, conductivity, etc.), metal type (material, shape,
etc.), and the installation environment of the system.
Estimated improvement rate after performing the HIS setting varies depending on type of test
249
Other Useful Functions
The rejector does not operate during HIS setting. Do not feed OK or
Caution NG product to the downstream.
2 Advanced Operations
OK
product
OK
product
4 Maintenance
If the OK product is taller than the vertical If the OK product is shorter in height than
center of detector head opening the vertical center of detector head opening
5 Appendix
250
Other Useful Functions
■ Setting
1 Press [Others] when the operation
stopped and press [HIS Setting] on the
right screen.
1 Basic Operations
The [HIS Setting] menu can be displayed
by pressing [Menu] → [Control Panel] →
[Home Screen Setting] → [Other Menu]
and adding “HIS Setting”.
2 Advanced Operations
screen
251
Other Useful Functions
5 Press the [Start] button to feed the OK
product.
1 Basic Operations
252
Other Useful Functions
8 Feed the NG product 6 times.
1 Basic Operations
▼ When the message “The effect from the
NG product is too small” appears
2 Advanced Operations
is not detected. If there are multiple types
of test piece, feed the product with the test
piece one-size larger than that used.
The estimated improvement rate of the detection sensitivity is not a guaranteed value but an
indication. Always check the detection sensitivity after executing the HIS setting function.
5 Appendix
253
Other Useful Functions
> Using Auto-Limit-Setting Function
The auto-limit-setting function automatically sets the optimum evaluation limit based on
randomness in inspected products and test piece effects. This function reduces
1 Basic Operations
OK product package state) of the products to be fed through to the normal line. If the
characteristics differ, prepare the multiple number of products.
An NG product is made by attaching a test piece to an OK product. To set
NG product
appropriate detection sensitivity, use all the prepared NG products.
To set the function, in whichever method, an inspected product should be fed through 5 to
99 times. The more the product is fed, the less incorrect detection occurs which leads to
more stable inspection.
products.
If the difference between evaluation values of OK and NG products is small, incorrect
detection frequently occurs. In such case, select method (1) to set the function.
5 Appendix
254
Other Useful Functions
1 Basic Operations
If a product is evaluated as NG during setting, the data of the product is not reflected on the
setting, and the product is rejected as an NG product.
Set the count to feed an OK product during operation in [Auto-limit count] in advance.
P. 180 Auto-limit setting
If the inspected product is bulk type, the parameter [MD Ultra under limit] must be set.
P. 56 Ins. condition set
■ Setting
1 Press [Others] with the operation
2 Advanced Operations
stopped and press [Auto Limit Setting] on
the right screen.
255
Other Useful Functions
4 Prepare OK or NG product according to
the instructions on the screen.
1 Basic Operations
256
Other Useful Functions
> Using FOCUS Setting Function
The FOCUS setting is the function to attempt an enhancement of the detection sensitivity
for metallic foreign materials such as metallic wire that are not different from Fe- or SUS-
1 Basic Operations
metallic balls to be used as a normal metallic contaminant. By registering the properties of
OK products and NG products into the metal detector, and the settings suited for the test
pieces to be detected is done automatically.
* The FOCUS setting function might not always increase the detection probability for
any metal. The detection results might be the same as those after auto-setting,
depending on the type of the inspection products (dimensions, shape, conductivity,
etc.), metal type (material, shape, etc.), and the installation environment of the
system.
2 Advanced Operations
* The FOCUS setting overwrites the setting details determined by Auto-setting. The
FOCUS setting corresponds to the characteristics of metallic foreign materials.
Therefore, the sensitivity for test pieces that can be detected in accordance with
Auto-setting may decrease. After setting, check the detection sensitivity using a test
piece. If Auto-setting is required again, do not use the current settings but configure
Auto-setting.
▪ If an inspection product does not interrupt the photocell axis, interrupt it by hand when
the product reaches the detector head.
▪ Usually, place NG products so that the metallic contaminant passes around the center
of detector head, where the detection probability becomes lowest, in order to increase
the detection probability for metal contaminants at any position in inspected products.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
257
Other Useful Functions
▪ The detection sensitivity can be increased by performing the FOCUS setting several times.
▪ Estimated improvement rate after performing the FOCUS setting varies depending on type of
metallic contaminant or inspected products.
1 Basic Operations
▪ If evaluation mode is “Check missing product”, FOCUS setting function is not available.
▪ If an NG product that has been used in the FOCUS setting cannot be set, the FOCUS setting
is not available.
▪ By newly performing the auto-setting ( P. 38 Registering a New Products – step 7),
FOCUS setting is restored to the default value.
▪ The FOCUS setting can be adjusted when performing the auto setting again.
P. 99 Auto Settings (Readjusting registered products)
▪ In the case of a false detection after executing the FOCUS setting, perform the auto setting
again by using the product causing the false detection.
2 Advanced Operations
products and NG products used for the FOCUS setting in the forced
rejection direction. Other rejectors do not function for the FOCUS
setting. Be careful to prevent OK products and NG products to be
used from flowing to the downstream.
258
Other Useful Functions
The following shows a place to attach a metallic contaminant:
Center width of metal Center height of metal
detector head opening Attach here detector head opening Attach here
OK
1 Basic Operations
OK
product product
OK product height > Center height of metal OK product height ≦ Center head of metal
detector head opening detector head opening
2 Advanced Operations
■ Setting
1 Press [Others] when the operation
stopped and press [FOCUS Setting] on
the right screen.
4 Maintenance
259
Other Useful Functions
4 Press the [Start] button to feed the OK
product.
1 Basic Operations
260
Other Useful Functions
▼ When the message “The effect from the NG product is too small” appears
1 Basic Operations
multiple types of metallic contaminant,
feed the product with the metallic
contaminant one-size larger than that
used.
▼ When the message “The effect from the NG product is too large” appears
2 Advanced Operations
The metallic contaminant attached to the
NG product has already been detected. If
there are several types of metallic
contaminants, attach a smaller metallic
contaminant to a product and feed it.
▪ Always check the detection sensitivity after executing the FOCUS setting function.
4 Maintenance
▪ If an impact of the NG product is poorly checked, the detection sensitivity may decrease.
5 Appendix
261
3 Installation and Connection
This chapter describes the installation method of the checkweigher
and the connection method with external equipment.
Installation 264
262
Selecting Installation Location and Transportation
Selecting Installation Location and Transportation
■ Installation location
Install the Checkweigher in a location meeting the following conditions.
1 Basic Operations
• Where the relative humidity is within 30% to 85% with no condensation.
• Where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight or radiant heat from a stove or heater.
• Where the power supply voltage does not fluctuate more than +10%, -15%.
2 Advanced Operations
500 mm
• Where there are no flammable, active gases or salt sprays. Back
side
• Where it will not be exposed to drafts from an air
conditioner, etc.
Checkweigher
• Where the location will not be affected by
noise from the checkweigher.
500 mm
Front
(The noise level of the checkweigher side
■ Transportation
Correct
places of fork
263
Installation
Installation
If excessive force is applied, the equipment may tip over and cause
Warning personal injury. Use the optional anchors to secure the equipment to
the floor.
1 Basic Operations
Before installation, make sure that all four rubber feet protectors have been removed.
▼ KWS6XXX type
2 Advanced Operations
264
Installation
▼ KWS5XXX type
1 Basic Operations
(1) Remove the screw in the LOCK part.
Loosen the lock nut with the spanner, LOCK part ← part
and remove the screw with a Phillips
screwdriver.
Lock nut
(2) Remove the screw in the ← part with a Long screw
Phillips screwdriver.
Sealing washer
2 Advanced Operations
(3) Replace the LOCK part screw and the Short screw
← part screw.
Make sure to attach the sealing
washers.
In use
2 Installing
Do not set any one of the 4 foot bolts too high or too low. It may cause
Warning the checkweigher to topple.
4 Maintenance
■ When adjusting foot bolts, do not hold the thread part by hand. Your
Caution hand may be injured by the edges of the thread.
■ When adjusting the height of the carrying belt surface, be careful so
that your finger does not get caught between the checkweigher and
upstream/downstream conveyors.
5 Appendix
265
Connecting External Equipment
(2) Adjust the foot bolts to align the conveyor belt heights with the production line.
• Place a level on the weighcell conveyor section to make sure it is level.
• Make sure that the checkweigher does not come into contact with the
2 Advanced Operations
upstream/downstream devices.
Downstream conveyor
depending on products.
Should not come off the floor and should be stable (4 locations). 0 to 2 mm
You may need to lower the carrying belt surface of the downstream conveyor by 0 to 2
mm, depending on the product being measured.
4 Maintenance
(3) Tighten the lock nut of the foot bolts with a spanner.
To connect the Anritsu rejector, refer to the operation manual of the rejector.
5 Appendix
266
Connecting External Equipment
Do not connect the power plug to the socket until the connection is
Warning complete. If you connect the cables while the power is connected,
there is a risk of receiving an electric shock, or of damage to the
1 Basic Operations
electronic components. Connect the devices and cables correctly,
following the descriptions below. Connection errors may result in
losing the waterproof and dustproof properties of the equipment.
After connecting the equipment, turn on the power and set the I/O signals.
P. 123 Setting External I/O Signals
2 Advanced Operations
> SSV-h/f Series
1 Remove the back panel of the indicator.
Loosen the 6 screws with a spanner, and
remove the back panel.
(5) Close the cable cover, and tighten the Cable cover
Cable inlet
screw with a hex key wrench.
3 Attach the back panel.
Attach the back panel of the indicator,
5 Appendix
267
Connecting External Equipment
Punch out
3 Route the external connection cable.
Cable clamp
(1) Loosen (A) of the cable clamp, and run (B)
(C) (A)
the cable as shown in the figure.
Install the back panel of the indicator, and tighten the 6 screws with a spanner.
268
Connecting Power Supply and Grounding, Turning On the Power
Connecting Power Supply and Grounding, Turning On the Power
1 Basic Operations
Warning ■ Make sure that the power supply voltage is within the specified
range. Running the checkweigher while the power supply voltage is
out of the specified range might cause failure or fire.
1 Check the specified power supply voltage range indicated on the checkweigher
nameplate.
2 Advanced Operations
2 Connect the power supply and grounding.
Make sure to ground the earth terminal.
▼ 100V specification
Standard power supply plug
▼ 200V specification
Brown
Connect the power supply cable. Blue Power supply
OFF
5 Appendix
269
4 Maintenance
This chapter describes the maintenance of the checkweigher and
troubleshooting.
Cleaning 273
270
Daily Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
1 Basic Operations
Do not operate the conveyor if the conveyor belt is misaligned. If the
Caution conveyor belt is misaligned, correct the alignment before starting
operation. The end face of the conveyor belt may touch the drive belt
and generate wear debris, which may contaminate the product.
2 Advanced Operations
(1) Before operation
Check the following items before starting operation.
■ Touching parts
Check that the checkweigher and upstream/downstream conveyors are not touching
with each other.
■ Misalignment of the conveyor belt
Make sure that the belt is not misaligned.
271
Daily Maintenance
If products cannot properly be rejected by the rejector, check the following points. After the
check and the adjustment, operate the rejector to check if products are properly rejected.
– Checkweigher and rejector –
1 Basic Operations
Conveyor
▪ The transfer timing for products is not deviated due the transfer error.
▪ The belt tension for conveyor belt and drive belt are strong enough.
▪ The timing belt and roller are not abraded.
▪ The transfer speed for products is not temporarily slowed down due to the collision between
the gate and the warpage or the ravel of the belt.
▪ The air cylinder or the actuator operates properly at the first run after non-working day.
– Rejector –
Drive unit
2 Advanced Operations
Detach the conveyor belt and check that there is no fraying on the edges.
4 Maintenance
272
Cleaning
Cleaning
1 Basic Operations
> SSV-h/f Series
Do not wash the checkweigher with water. Make sure to turn off the
Warning power switch before cleaning.
2 Advanced Operations
■
273
Cleaning
(2) Conveyor belt
After operation, remove the conveyor belt and wash it thoroughly. Mold
Caution might grow if you continue using the conveyor belt with remnants from
1 Basic Operations
Clean the conveyor belt thoroughly and dry it. If you cannot reserve
Caution enough drying time, keep a spare belt. Never use a dryer.
Remove the conveyor belt from the conveyor unit and clean it.
Examples of required cleaning
2 Advanced Operations
■ Wash off remains of products using neutral detergent and rinse the belt with water.
■ When using neutral detergent or a solution of hypochlorous acid, always rinse the belt with
water, otherwise mold may grow and packings may deteriorate in early stages to disturb
operation.
■ Do not use a soft plastic brush to clean the conveyor surface. It may accelerate wear of the
belt surface. If you continue using a worn roller for a long period, the metal detection unit
might yield false detections due to the influence of wear debris. Thoroughly clean and remove
the wear debris on the conveyor belt.
■ Never use a dryer to dry the belt.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
274
Cleaning
(3) Roller
The alumite-treated roller surface improves corrosion resistance. If the treated surface is
damaged due to a scratch on the roller, corrosion may occur from the damaged area.
1 Basic Operations
Accordingly, take care not to scratch the roller.
Additionally, the alumite-treated surface may corrode if not cleaned properly. Clean the
roller according to the instructions in the table below.
If the roller is badly stained, remove and clean it. Do not soak or boil the roller when
cleaning.
Cleaning methods
Alkaline detergent ×
2 Advanced Operations
Organic solvent such as thinner or toluene ×
Solution of hypochlorous acid (*1) △
Neutral detergent (*2) ○
* ○: Can use, △: Can use but corrosion resistance lowered, ×: Cannot use
*1 Clean the parts with a 200 ppm or lower hypochlorous acid solution, and fully wash
it off after cleaning.
*2 Use of neutral detergent for cleaning is recommended.
Clean the areas around the detector head periodically. Mold might
Caution grow if you continue operating with residues from previous operations
left on that area. In addition, the metal detector may detect residues as
contaminants.
Resin or packing in the area around the detection head opening deteriorates earlier in
accordance with how to wash it. Wash it in accordance with the following table. 4 Maintenance
Cleaning method
Organic solvent such as thinner or ×
toluene
Alcohol △
Solution of hypochlorous acid (*1) △
Neutral detergent (*2) ○
* ○: Can use, △: Can use but corrosion resistance lowered, ×: Cannot use
*1 Clean the parts with a 200 ppm or lower hypochlorous acid solution, and fully wash
it off after cleaning.
5 Appendix
275
Cleaning
(5) Main Unit
The main unit is rated IP66 using the Ingress Protection Rating.
1 Basic Operations
What is IP66?
The main unit is protected against intrusions of dust and water to the interior.
It can withstand water projected in powerful jets (12.5mm nozzle) at 100 liters per minute from all
directions from a distance of 2.5-3m. (IEC 60529)
■ Clean the checkweigher using water that is up to 60°C. Clean the metal detector with
water that is 40°C or lower.
■ Before cleaning with water, check that the indicator cover, cover of optional printer etc.,
2 Advanced Operations
pressure from a horizontal direction on the side plate of the weigh conveyor section.
Doing so may cause a weighcell failure.
■ The tube under the weighcell is an air breather; take care not to allow water to enter
the end of the tube.
■ The signal tower (optional) mounted on the side of the indicator is equivalent to IP54
and has a splash-proof structure. Do not to spray it with water.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
276
Cleaning
> Maintenance of Stainless Steel
Stainless steel is very rust-resistant, but it is not completely rust-free under all conditions.
It can sometimes become soiled or rusty depending on the environment and usage
1 Basic Operations
conditions. Periodic maintenance is required.
When any stain or rust appears, clean it by using the following methods. After cleaning,
wipe it thoroughly with water to wipe off all chemicals used.
2 Advanced Operations
an organic solvent (such as alcohol, benzene, or acetone).
Rust
Wipe off with a sponge or cloth soaked in a mild detergent or
(due to rust-promoting ferrous
soapy water.
particles or salts)
277
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations
When removing the catch clip, be careful so that your finger does not
Caution get caught.
Caution Be sure not to drop the conveyor removed from the equipment.
2 Advanced Operations
Remove the product guide or optional cross plate in advance if they are being used.
Knurled screw
Belt cover
Catch clip
(1) Lift the weigh conveyor unit and remove Drive belt
the drive belt.
5 Appendix
278
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
■ KWS55XX type
Remove the product guide or optional cross plate in advance if they are being used.
1 Basic Operations
1 Remove the roller cover and belt cover.
(1) Loosen the two screws with a Phillips
screwdriver and remove the two roller
covers. Roller
cover
(2) Loosen the screw (at one location) with a
Phillips screwdriver and remove the belt
2 Advanced Operations
Belt cover
cover.
Screw
Drive belt
4 Maintenance
Pull toward
you to
remove
5 Appendix
279
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
> Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit
Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations
is turned to the OFF position. For your safety, make sure to install the
belt cover and roller cover before operation. Contact Anritsu if any of
these components are broken.
Make sure that all catch clips are firmly locked before starting
Warning operation.
2 Advanced Operations
Catch clip
Knurled screw
5 Appendix
280
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
■ KWS55XX type
1 Install the weight conveyor to the weigh Weigh conveyor unit
conveyor section.
1 Basic Operations
Lower
(1) Mount the weigh conveyor unit and
install the drive belt.
Drive belt
(2) Lower the weigh conveyor unit slowly to
fit it onto the weigh conveyor section.
2 Advanced Operations
2 Tighten the four screws with a spanner.
Screw
4 Make sure that the screws in Steps 2 and 3 have been tightened.
4 Maintenance
If you are using a product guide or optional cross plate, install it at the end.
5 Appendix
281
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
> Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unit
Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations
Caution Be sure not to drop the conveyor removed from the equipment.
2 Advanced Operations
Remove the product guide and optional cross plate in advance if they are used.
each side).
Catch clip
Belt cover
Knurled screw
4 Maintenance
Belt cover
Catch clip
282
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
2 Remove the infeed conveyor unit from the
weigh infeed section.
1 Basic Operations
the drive belt.
Lift
2 Advanced Operations
Drive belt
Pull toward
you to
remove
283
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
> Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit
Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations
is in the OFF position. For your safety, make sure to install the belt
cover before starting operation. Contact Anritsu if any of these
components are broken.
Before starting operation, make sure that all the catch clips are fixed
Warning securely.
2 Advanced Operations
Lower
slowly
Drive belt
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
284
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
2 Install the belt cover and lock the catch clip.
1 Basic Operations
(1) Install the belt cover and tighten the
knurled screw with a flat-blade
screwdriver.
Catch clip
2 Advanced Operations
Belt cover
Knurled screw
Belt cover
Catch clip
4 Maintenance
If you are using a product guide or optional cross plate, install it at the end.
5 Appendix
285
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
> Removing the Conveyor Belt/Roller
The removal procedure is the same for both the weigh conveyor and the infeed conveyor.
1 Basic Operations
Adjuster
Loosen Tighten
Pull out
Be careful not to drop the rollers. Pull out
Carrying
belt
Drive roller
Driven roller
Drive belt
4 Maintenance
Driven roller
Drive belt
286
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
> Installing the Conveyor Belt/Roller
1 Basic Operations
sufficient space. Be careful not to drop the roller.
2 Advanced Operations
(3) Install the conveyor belt. Driven roller
Frame Drive belt
The flow of products should match the
direction indicated inside the belt.
Install
Adjuster
Loosen Tighten
3 Install the weigh conveyor unit to the weigh
conveyor section.
287
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
■ Infeed conveyor unit
1 Install the conveyor belt and rollers. Carrying belt
Install
2 Advanced Operations
288
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
> Adjusting Belt Alignment
Check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment after the conveyor belt is removed from the
conveyor unit and installed again or is replaced with a new belt.
1 Basic Operations
The procedure for adjusting belt misalignment is the same for both the weigh conveyor
and the infeed conveyor.
2 Advanced Operations
Adjuster 2
Misalignment state
Adjustment
(conveyor viewed from above)
Flow
The gap on the adjuster 2 side is Tighten adjuster 1 or
wide. loosen adjuster 2. Adjuster 1
Adjuster 1 Adjuster 2
Loosen
Flow
Gap
Carrying belt
4 Maintenance
2 Feed a product with a weight approximately 2 times the maximum weight range.
If it cannot be carried, adjust the tension of the conveyor belt with the two adjusters.
3 Operate the checkweigher for 2 to 3 minutes and then check the conveyor belt for belt
misalignment.
5 Appendix
Be careful not to put too much tension on the conveyor belt. It may damage the roller or cause
uneven rotation.
289
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
■ Infeed conveyor section
1 Operate the conveyor and check the belt misalignment state of the conveyor belt.
If the belt is misaligned, adjust the tension of the conveyor belt with the two adjusters.
Adjust them so that gaps on the roller ends are equal.
1 Basic Operations
Misalignment state
Adjustment
(conveyor viewed from above)
The gap on the knob 2 side is Tighten knob 1 or
wide. loosen knob 2.
Loosen
Flow
Gap
2 Advanced Operations
Knob 1 Knob 2
Flow
Gap
3 Installation and Connection
Knob 1 Knob 2
Carrying belt
3 Operate the checkweigher for 2 to 3 minutes and then check for belt misalignment.
Be careful not to put too much tension on the conveyor belt. It may damage the roller or cause
uneven rotation.
5 Appendix
290
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations
is turned to the OFF position
When removing the optional product guide or pulling out the motor, be
Caution careful that your finger does not get caught by the catch clip.
When pulling out the motor, be careful that your fingers do not caught
Caution between the motor and the indicator.
2 Advanced Operations
Caution Be sure not to drop the conveyor removed from the equipment.
291
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
> Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit
Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations
Before starting operation, make sure that all the catch clips are fixed
Warning securely.
Drive roller
5 Appendix
292
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
(2) Lock the two catch clips on the motor by
holding the motor by hand.
Remove the gap between the motor and
drive roller, and lock the catch clips.
1 Basic Operations
When installing the motor, make sure there is no No gap
gap, as shown in the figure. If any gap exists, install
it again. A motor that is not installed correctly may
cause the coupling to wear quickly or poor weighing
accuracy.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
293
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
> Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unit
Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations
When removing the optional product guide or pulling out the motor, be
Caution careful that your finger does not get caught by the catch clip.
Caution Be sure not to drop the conveyor removed from the equipment.
2 Advanced Operations
Lift
Hook
5 Appendix
Remove
294
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
> Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit
Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations
is in the OFF position.
Before starting operation, make sure that all the catch clips are fixed
Warning securely.
2 Advanced Operations
1 Install the infeed conveyor unit to the
infeed conveyor section.
Lower
slowly
Hook
lock
4 Maintenance
Catch clip
5 Appendix
295
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
3 Install the motor. Motor
Catch clip
(1) Insert the coupling into the drive roller.
If it is hard to insert, push and rotate the Insert
1 Basic Operations
(2) Lock the two catch clips on the motor by Drive roller
holding the motor by hand.
Remove the gap between the motor and
drive roller, and lock the catch clips.
2 Advanced Operations
296
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
> Removing the Conveyor Belt
The removal procedure is the same for both the weigh conveyor section and the infeed
conveyor section.
1 Basic Operations
1 Remove the weigh/infeed conveyor from
the weigh/infeed conveyor section.
2 Advanced Operations
Knob
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
297
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
> Installing the Conveyor Belt
The installation procedure is the same for both the weigh conveyor section and the infeed
conveyor section.
1 Basic Operations
Profile inside
carrying belt
2 Advanced Operations
Conveyor groove
Knob
Driven roller
3 Installation and Connection
part Turn
3 Install the weigh/infeed conveyor unit to
the weigh/infeed conveyor section.
298
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
> Adjusting Belt Alignment
Check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment after the conveyor belt is removed from the
conveyor unit and installed again or is replaced with a new belt.
1 Basic Operations
The procedure for adjusting belt misalignment is the same for both the weigh conveyor
section and the infeed conveyor section.
■ The water-proof conveyor normally does not require belt alignment adjustments because the
profile attached to the conveyor belt serves as a mechanism that prevents belt misalignments.
■ The belt might become misaligned if the checkweigher is used with foreign material
2 Advanced Operations
accumulated on the back of the conveyor belt. Using a misaligned belt for a long time may
shorten the lifespan of the profile. Clean the front and back surfaces of the conveyor belt and
roller periodically.
4 Maintenance
3 Operate it for 2 to 3 minutes and then check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment.
5 Appendix
Be careful not to put too much tension on the conveyor belt. It may damage the roller or
cause uneven rotation.
299
Check Items for Failure
Check Items for Failure
(2) Refit removed connectors and parts at their original locations after check.
2 Advanced Operations
(3) If sudden environmental changes, lightning, power failure due to abnormal voltage,
mechanical shock, or unusual usage are the direct causes of the fault, overall
inspection is necessary.
(4) If the operation unit or controller is faulty, use this belt as a conveyor for forced
operation.
> Troubleshooting
This section describes how to resolve troubles.
If the problem is not resolved after taking the appropriate actions, or if the problem occurs
again, contact Anritsu. At this time, Anritsu might ask you to submit support data.
P. 311 Outputting support data
NO
Voltage is supplied to the power
Check the power source.
receptacle.
YES
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the power turns off immediately after it is
turned on, request a repair.
5 Appendix
300
Check Items for Failure
■ The Screen Becomes Blank
YES
Tap the touch screen. Does the The blank screen was caused by a
screen return to the original state? function that turns off the back light
1 Basic Operations
when no operation is performed for a
NO
period of time. This is not a failure.
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the screen is not displayed, request a repair.
The Stop button was pressed after NO After an error occurs, press the Stop button
2 Advanced Operations
the error message occurred. once before starting the checkweigher. This is
not a failure.
YES
Both the Start button and Stop Internal system error. Turn off the power and
YES
button lamps light. turn it on again. If the problem persists, ask us
for a repair.
NO
4 Maintenance
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
5 Appendix
301
Check Items for Failure
■ NG Products Not Rejected
YES
YES
There is a stain or foreign object on Clean the rejector and make sure it
the rejector. moves smoothly.
NO
NO
2 Advanced Operations
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
Wind or vibration is affecting the YES Change the direction of the air conditioner.
checkweigher. Install the checkweigher away from the
machine generating vibrations.
NO
Products are transferred smoothly NO Adjust the height and gap of the
from/to the upstream/downstream
upstream/downstream equipment.
equipment.
YES
YES
4 Maintenance
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
5 Appendix
302
Check Items for Failure
■ Product Length Exceeded (A039)/Dbl. Product Alarm (A001)/CW Capacity
Exceeded (A012) Occurs
Photocell Error (E011) Occurs
NO
Product length is set correctly. Set the product length correctly in
1 Basic Operations
the product registration.
YES
Products slip or jump while being YES Adjust the conveyor speed to
carried. obtain a stable conveyor state.
NO
2 Advanced Operations
NO
completely. detection state ( P. 348), or use
the optional sensor for transparent
YES products.
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
303
Check Items for Failure
■ Manual Zero-set Error (E008) / External Zero-set Error (E009) Occurs
Zero-setting Error (E040) / W. cell contact detection (E049) / -OVF occurrence
(E116) Occurs
1 Basic Operations
NO
Weighcell lock is released. Release weighcell lock.
YES
YES Adjust the installation location so that
The checkweigher is in contact with the
the checkweigher does not come into
upstream/downstream equipment.
contact with the upstream/downstream
NO equipment, and operate it again.
2 Advanced Operations
YES
There is a stain or foreign object on Clean the equipment.
the weighcell or weigh conveyor.
NO
Change the direction of the air
YES
Wind or vibration is affecting the conditioner.
checkweigher. Install the checkweigher away from the
YES
The system is recovered by Place an item whose weight is known
performing a weighcell self-check
on the weighcell and make sure that
( P. 345).
the sensitivity is normal.
NO Also, make sure that Operation check
YES
The system is recovered by could be performed successfully.
performing sensitivity correction
( P. 94).
NO
4 Maintenance
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
5 Appendix
304
Check Items for Failure
■ Operation Check Fails
1 Basic Operations
on-screen instructions.
YES
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
305
Check Items for Failure
■ General check items about troubles in relation to metal detection
The metal detector is susceptible to electromagnetic waves and vibrations from the
surrounding area and metal. Install the equipment in a place that is subject to as little of
these external influences as possible. Contact Anritsu for a consultation on specific
1 Basic Operations
measures.
Major items to be checked
Item Effect on the metal detector Example actions
The power system used is the Electromagnetic noise
same as that of another piece of enters through the power Use another power system.
equipment. line.
The element responds to
A device equipped with an Change the carrier frequency
the electromagnetic noise
2 Advanced Operations
306
Check Items for Failure
The detection performance becomes YES Use a different power system from
stable if an upstream, downstream, that for the peripheral devices, or
or peripheral device is stopped (or install the equipment away from the
turned off). peripheral devices.
1 Basic Operations
NO
NO
2 Advanced Operations
Adjust the height of the conveyor
surface level to the upstream and
The metal bar graph reaches red YES
downstream devices. Also make
when a product is moved onto the
sure that the inspected product is
MD conveyor.
not charged with static electricity.
NO
NO
4 Maintenance
The detection sensitivity is not YES Perform “Make auto setting newly”.
improved even after performing The current setting might not be
“Make auto setting by using current optimum if the characteristics of the
settings”. inspected product have changed.
NO
The position of the products and NO Adjust the carrying unit so that the
product feeding interval are stable. product conveyance status is stable.
5 Appendix
YES
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
307
Check Items for Failure
■ The bar graph reaches red, but the product is not evaluated as MDNG.
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
2 Advanced Operations
■ The number of products rejected as MDNG is not the same as the MDNG
quantity displayed in the statistics.
A double product is detected when products are fed through at an interval of less
than 280 mm.
When a double product is detected, two products might be rejected for each D-Prod.
NG detection.
If the rejection performance is not high, two products might be rejected with one
rejecting operation.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
308
Check Items for Failure
■ One of the following metal detector errors has occurred: Dbl. product (A501),
Capacity exceeded (A504), Length exceeded (A505), or Photocell error (E511).
NO
The set product length is correct. Set the correct product length at
1 Basic Operations
product registration.
YES
The product slips or bounces while YES Adjust the conveyor speed so as to
it is being conveyed. make the conveyance status
stabilized.
NO
The product consistently blocks the NO Make sure that the position and
2 Advanced Operations
photocell on the metal detector. detecting status of the photocell on
the metal detector are correct (
YES
P. 348).
Or, use a transparent sensor
(optional).
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
■ Auto balance adjustment amount error (E543) or balance error (E544) has
occurred.
There is a large metal object near YES Remove the metal object near the
the metal detector. metal detector.
NO
4 Maintenance
NO
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
5 Appendix
309
Check Items for Failure
■ Other Unexpected Problems Occur
Is there any wind or vibration YES Change the direction of the air conditioner.
NO
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
310
Check Items for Failure
> Outputting support data
If a problem occurs in the system, support data for recovery can be output.
If an Anritsu sales engineer requests you to submit support data, output it to a USB
1 Basic Operations
memory and send the USB memory to the sales engineer at Anritsu.
Problem occurred
↓ ←If the problem is not resolved even after troubleshooting
Contact an Anritsu sales engineer
↓ ←If an Anritsu sales engineer requests you to submit support data
Output support data
2 Advanced Operations
* Access level 2 or higher (not changeable) is required to use this function.
4 Maintenance
If [No] is selected
5 Appendix
311
Check Items for Failure
4 Select the [Check the weighcell state]
check box, and then tap [Yes].
1 Basic Operations
(Example: SUPPORT_KWS6001AF04_4600000001_V01010001_20121108122346.pwy)
312
Check Items for Failure
> Forced Operation
1 Basic Operations
equipment maintenance only.
2 Advanced Operations
– The conveyor starts running immediately after the power-on.
– The conveyor does not stop by pressing the stop button.
<If the emergency stop switch is provided>
During the forced operation, the conveyor starts running immediately
after the emergency stop switch is released.
4 Maintenance
Evaluation (OK/NG) and rejection are not performed during the forced operation.
313
Check Items for Failure
3 Set the dip switches S3-1 and S3-2 of the MPU2010 unit to ON.
1 Basic Operations
Dip switch S3
X9 S3
Printer
X17
S3-1
1:MANU
PAT 2:SELF
S3-2
MPU2010A UNIT
2 Advanced Operations
(1) Operation
Make sure that there is no person around the conveyor. The conveyor
Caution starts running when the following procedure is performed.
If the conveyor does not start running by turning on the power switch,
Caution the motor control unit is faulty. Turn off the power switch immediately.
4 Maintenance
(2) Stopping
1 Turn off the power switch.
5 Appendix
314
Check Items for Failure
■ Releasing forced operation
1 Basic Operations
2 Remove the rear cover of the indicator.
P. 266 Connecting External Equipment
3 Set the dip switches S3-1 and S3-2 of the MPU2010 unit to OFF.
2 Advanced Operations
Dip switch S3
X9 S3
Printer
S3-1
X17 1:MANU
PAT 2:SELF S3-2
MPU2010A UNIT
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
315
Error Messages and Solutions
Error Messages and Solutions
For information on how to reset errors and alarms, refer to "Handling Errors and Alarms".
P. 71 Handling Errors and Alarms
E: Error, A: Alarm
1 Basic Operations
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Controller FLASH Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E001 ROM Error the parts must be replaced. Call Anritsu or its distributor
for service
Backup Battery Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Detected again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
* The set values disappear a few hours after turning the
2 Advanced Operations
E003
power supply off. To continue production, press the
error release key, set the relevant values, and use the
equipment without turning the power supply off.
Controller RAM Error Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E004 the parts must be replaced. Call Anritsu or its distributor
for service
Controller EEP ROM Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E005 Error the parts must be replaced. Call Anritsu or its distributor
3 Installation and Connection
for service
Low 24 V Power Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E006 Supply Voltage again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
Detected
A zero-set error Zero-setting might have been performed while a product
occurred due to the was placed on the weigh conveyor.
screen operation. Perform zero-setting while nothing is being fed through
on the weigh conveyor.
Is the weigh conveyor touching the photocell cables or
motor cables?
Remove the weigh conveyor to check the cable
4 Maintenance
E008
arrangement. The weigh conveyor might be touching
the cables due to bumping.
Are all the parts attached to the weigh conveyor?
Check that all the parts are attached to the conveyor,
referring to the instruction manual.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
5 Appendix
316
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
A zero-set error has Zero-setting might have been performed from the
occurred due to external device while a product was placed on the weigh
1 Basic Operations
external device conveyor.
control. Check the input timing of the external zero-set signal.
Perform zero-setting while nothing is being fed through
on the weigh conveyor.
E009 Is the weigh conveyor touching the photocell cables or
motor cables?
Remove the weigh conveyor to check the cable
arrangement. The weigh conveyor might be touching
the cables due to bumping.
2 Advanced Operations
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
above, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
Photocell signal is not Is there any product or something interrupting between
detected. the photocell and reflection plate?
If so, remove them.
Are the photocell and reflection plate clean?
If they are dirty, clean them.
317
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
A mass was detected A product might have been fed through on the weigh
without the photocell conveyor without interrupting the photocell. Adjust the
1 Basic Operations
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): On
Did your body or clothes come into contact with the
weigh conveyor? Be careful not to touch the weigh
conveyor when operating the equipment.
Are the in-feed, weigh, and RJ conveyor belts warped or
frayed? If so, replace the belt or cut the fraying so that
the frayed part of the belt does not interrupt the weigh
E013
conveyor photocell.
3 Installation and Connection
318
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
RJ Error Detected Check the connection with the rejector. After checking
the connection, turn the motor on and then off again or
1 Basic Operations
E016 turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
* For details, see the operation manual of the rejector.
RJ Output The circuit protector of the rejector output contact has
Overcurrent Error been activated to protect the device from overcurrent.
Detected Turn the main power supply off, and check that the
connection to the rejector is appropriate.
When connecting to devices other than those
E017
2 Advanced Operations
manufactured by Anritsu, check that the device is being
used at the rated voltage.
After checking this, restore the circuit protector. If this
error occurs again, contact your dealer's customer
support.
RJ Motor Overcurrent Check that the conveyor is not overloaded. After
Error Detected checking this, turn the motor on and then off again or
E018
turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
E024
supply on again. After starting the rejector, check its
operation. If this error occurs again, contact your
dealer's customer support.
319
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
RJ CPU Error Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E025
Detected call Anritsu or its distributor for service
1 Basic Operations
320
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
No Eval. Prod. NG products may have been fed in the OK direction.
Passed Stop the conveyor, and take measures to recheck the
1 Basic Operations
product.
E033 To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
A033 and rejector operation are correct.
* This appears if a product that has not been evaluated
yet has passed through the photocell on the PASS
side.
RJ Alarm OK products may have been rejected by mistake. Take
measures to recheck the product.
E034
2 Advanced Operations
To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
A034 and rejector operation are correct.
* This appears if an OK product has passed through
the photocell on the NG side.
NG Prod. RJ Error Products may be stuck in the rejector or NG products
may have been fed in the OK direction. Stop the
conveyor, and take measures to recheck the product.
E035
To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
A035
and rejector operation are correct.
321
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Fine Adjust. Error Check that the measurement timing is correct, the
master product weight matches the setting value, and
1 Basic Operations
322
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Air Pressure Error Check the air pressure by using the manometer, and
Detected adjust it to the normal value. After adjusting it, turn the
1 Basic Operations
E061 motor on and then off again or turn the main power
supply on again. If this error occurs again, contact your
dealer's customer support.
NGBox Full NGBox has become full. NG products may not be fed
E070
correctly while NGBox remains full during production.
A070
Empty NGBox.
E072 NGBox Open NGBox is unlocked. Lock it.
A072
2 Advanced Operations
No detection of Product may be stuck in select area, or may have been
product in the RJ3 incorrectly sent onto other than the RJ3 path. Stop the
E081 acceptance path conveyor and move the product sent onto the RJ3 path
A081 back to the beginning for re-inspection.
* Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver did not
detect a product that should not be on the RJ3 path.
Detection of product in Product may have been incorrectly sent onto the RJ3
the RJ3 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E082
path the RJ3 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.
323
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Detection of prod. in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ1
the RJ1 reject path for path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E086
1 Basic Operations
Detection of product in Product may have been incorrectly sent onto the RJ5
the RJ5 reject path path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E088
the RJ5 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.
A088
* Appears when the RJ5 path light receiver detects a
product that should not be on the RJ5 path.
Detection of prod. in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ5
the RJ5 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E089
path for prod. not the beginning for inspection.
3 Installation and Connection
A089
inspected * Appears when the RJ5 path light receiver detects a
product not yet inspected on the RJ5 path.
Weighcell Error Check connectors and cables between weighcell and
indicator. After checking, turn the main power on again.
E101
If this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
Zero Calibration Error Check the weighcell for the following and perform
sensitivity correction again.
▪ Nothing is placed
▪ No dirt or foreign objects are adhering
E102
4 Maintenance
324
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Weighcell Connection Check connectors and cables between weighcell and
Error indicator. After checking, turn the main power on again.
E108
1 Basic Operations
If this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
Weighcell Error Check connectors and cables between weighcell and
indicator. After checking, turn the main power on again.
E109
If this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
The zero-point The weighcell might be locked. Check that the lock is
deviates widely in the released.
2 Advanced Operations
negative direction. For how to release the lock, see the instruction manual.
After checking, perform zero-setting.
Is the weigh conveyor touching the photocell cables or
motor cables?
Remove the weigh conveyor to check the cable
arrangement. The weigh conveyor might be touching
E116 the cables due to bumping.
After checking, perform zero-setting.
Are all the parts attached to the weigh conveyor?
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
325
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Overload of the Is the upstream conveyor touching the equipment?
carrying conveyor was The motor might have received an excessive load due
1 Basic Operations
Detection of product in Product may have been incorrectly sent onto the RJ3
the RJ3 reject path path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E282
the RJ3 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.
A282
* Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver detects a
product that should not be on the RJ3 path.
Detection of product in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ3
the RJ3 reject path for path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E283
product not inspected the beginning for inspection.
A283
* Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver detects a
product not yet inspected on the RJ3 path.
5 Appendix
326
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
No detection of Product may be stuck in select area, or may have been
product in the RJ1 incorrectly sent onto other than the RJ1 path. Stop the
1 Basic Operations
E284 acceptance path conveyor and move the product sent onto the RJ1 path
A284 back to the beginning for re-inspection.
* Appears when the RJ1 path light receiver did not
detect a product that should not be on the RJ1 path.
Detection of product in Product may have been incorrectly sent onto the RJ1
the RJ1 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E285
path the RJ1 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.
A285
* Appears when the RJ1 path light receiver detects a
product that should not be on the RJ1 path.
2 Advanced Operations
Detection of prod. in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ1
the RJ1 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E286
path for prod. not the beginning for inspection.
A286
inspected * Appears when the RJ1 path light receiver detects a
product not yet inspected on the RJ1 path.
No detection of Product may be stuck in select area, or may have been
product in the RJ5 incorrectly sent onto other than the RJ5 path. Stop the
E287 acceptance path conveyor and move the product sent onto the RJ5 path
A289
inspected * Appears when the RJ5 path light receiver detects a
product not yet inspected on the RJ5 path.
Product length was Sorter detected a product length longer than the result
not correctly detected of multiplying the product length by the maximum
E290 by the sorter product length detection ratio. Multiple products may be
A290 sent onto the conveyor without any gap between them.
Make sure products are separated when placed on the
conveyor.
5 Appendix
327
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
RJ Photocell Alarm Is there anything (a product or other object) between the
photocell and reflection plate?
1 Basic Operations
adjustment.
Does only the green LED on the photocell turn on when
a product is being fed through? Adjust the photocell,
E352 checking the following.
A352 * If using a custom-made photocell, check the
documentation for the photocell before performing
adjustment.
▪ When a product is fed;
LED (Gr): On
3 Installation and Connection
328
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Photocell Error Is there anything (a product or other object) between the
photocell and reflection plate?
1 Basic Operations
If there is, remove it.
Are the photocell and reflection plate clean?
If they are dirty, clean them.
Is the green LED on the photocell on?
If it is not on, the photocell may be faulty or a cable may
be disconnected. Request repair.
* If using a custom-made photocell, check the
documentation for the photocell before performing
2 Advanced Operations
adjustment.
E511
Does only the green LED on the photocell turn on when
a product is being fed through? Adjust the photocell,
checking the following.
* If using a custom-made photocell, check the
documentation for the photocell before performing
adjustment.
Are the installation angle brackets of the photocell and
MD Send Coil Current Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E542
Error again, contact your dealer's customer support.
5 Appendix
329
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
MD Auto-balance Is there a large metallic object near the metal detector
Correction Error head?
1 Basic Operations
330
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
No Connection with Abnormal connection with detection head. Check cables
MD Head and connectors. Toggle power off and on and if error not
1 Basic Operations
recovered, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
(Check the type of MD head and confirm that the
MD-SIG02 is set below.
E550 ▪ M5 S1:2, S2:6
▪ M6 S1:2, S2:4
If the setting is also correctly recurs when this error
occurs again, there is a possibility that the model of the
MD head software does not match. Set S4-4 of
MD-SIG02 to ON and download the head software.
2 Advanced Operations
No Communication Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E551
with MD Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
No Communication The connection with the detector head is incorrect. The
with MD Head connection cable and connector may not be connected.
E552
Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
No Sync. with MD Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E553
Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
331
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
MD Head Temp. Error The metal detector head temperature exceeds the
permitted limit. Inspection cannot continue.
1 Basic Operations
MD Head Power Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Voltage Error again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
2 Advanced Operations
E572
* This error occurs due to a failure in the main power
supply.
MD Head Power Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Voltage Error again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
E573
* This error occurs due to a failure in the power supply
to the board (PRE, POW).
MD Head Power Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Voltage Error again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
E574
3 Installation and Connection
No Communication Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E580 with MD Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
No Sync. with MD Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
E581
* This error occurs when missing metal detector head
transmission data is detected.
332
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
No Communication Abnormal connection with detection head. Check cables
with MD Head and connectors. Toggle power off and on and if error not
1 Basic Operations
recovered, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
(Check the type of MD head and confirm that the
MD-SIG02 is set below.
E609 ▪ M5 S1:2, S2:6
▪ M6 S1:2, S2:4
If the setting is also correctly recurs when this error
occurs again, there is a possibility that the model of the
MD head software does not match. Set S4-4 of
MD-SIG02 to ON and download the head software.
2 Advanced Operations
EXT-I/O(A) unit Check connectors and cables between EXT-I/O unit and
connection error. the indicator. After checking, turn the main power on
again. If this error occurs again, the unit might have
E621
failed. Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
* If "EXT-I/O(A):connect check" is "No", the machine
regards the unit as an unused one.
EXT-I/O(B) unit Check connectors and cables between EXT-I/O unit and
connection error. the indicator. After checking, turn the main power on
MOT-CONT unit Ext conveyor does not work. Turn the main power on
connection error. again. If this error occurs again, the unit might have
E625 failed. Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
* If "MOT-CONT:connect check" is "No", the machine
regards the unit as an unused one.
Network Connection Data accumulates until reconnection because the
Disconnected network is disconnected. Check whether the power
supplies of the PC and hub are on, the network cable is
E930
connected, and the network settings are correct. If this
5 Appendix
333
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Dbl. Product Alarm The next product moved into the weighcell before the
product weight was measured.
A001
1 Basic Operations
334
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Ope. Check Operation cannot be started since an operation check
A018
Untouched has not been performed. Perform an operation check.
1 Basic Operations
Controller Comm. Turn the main power on again. If this alarm occurs
A023
Timeout again, call Anritsu or its distributor for service
The product length is A product that is shorter than "Product Length x
short. P.Len.Detection Multi.(-Lim)" is detected. The number of
product packs might not match the specified number.
(For example, 2-pack products are fed while the setting
is 3.) Check the packing machine.
The products might have become misaligned while
2 Advanced Operations
A037 being conveyed. Either attach a product guide to align
the products, or change the settings below to specify a
minimum product length that is equal to or more than a
value of "Product Length x P.Len.Detection Multi.(-Lim)".
▪ Product length
▪ Prd.Det.Multi.(-Lim)
▪ Prd.Det.Multi.(+Lim)
The product length is A product that is longer than "Product Length x
exceeded. P.Len.Detection Multi.(+Lim)" has been detected. The
▪ Product length
▪ Prd.Det.Multi.(-Lim)
▪ Prd.Det.Multi.(+Lim)
5 Appendix
335
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Can not recognize the The products might have been conveyed too close
product Length together. Keep sufficient gaps between products when
1 Basic Operations
conveying them.
The product length setting might be too long. Check if
the length is proper.
▪ Product length
A039
If the stop measurement option is used, the product
length setting might be too short. Check if the length is
proper. If the specified product length is too short, the
measurement stop timing becomes too fast to be
2 Advanced Operations
performed correctly.
▪ Product length
CW Capacity Turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm
Exceeded occurs again, contact your dealer's customer support.
A051 * This alarm occurs if 50 or more products have been
fed through during the time between T2 (Scale
balance time) and T3 (Rejector delay time).
CW Capacity If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the interval
Exceeded between products.
3 Installation and Connection
A052
* This alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been
fed through during T2 (Scale balance time).
CW Capacity If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the interval
Exceeded between products.
* This alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been
fed through during T3 (Rejector delay time). This
A053
alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been fed
through between T3 (Rejector delay time) and T4
(Rejector operation time) when the ranking shift
function (option) is used.
4 Maintenance
336
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
CW Capacity If this alarm frequently occurs, widen the product
A061
Exceeded interval.
1 Basic Operations
CW Capacity If this alarm frequently occurs, widen the product
A062
Exceeded interval.
I/O Output signal On An I/O output signal whose output type is set to Hold 2
A071 has turned on. When this alarm is reset, the I/O output
signal turns off.
A101 Comm. Alarm Check connectors and cables between weighcell and
indicator. After checking, turn the main power on again.
A102
If this alarm occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor
2 Advanced Operations
A103 for service
A104
A105
A106 CW Capacity Turn the main power on again. If this alarm occurs
Exceeded again, call Anritsu or its distributor for service
A107
A111 Weighcell Alarm Check connectors and cables between weighcell and
indicator. After checking, turn the main power on again.
A112
If this alarm occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor
337
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Printer Performance ▪ The printer performance may have been exceeded.
Capacity Exceeded Increase the print interval by increasing the statistics
1 Basic Operations
A157 Error turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
again, contact your dealer's customer support.
Serial A, B Comm. Check that all serial cables and connectors are
Alarm connected correctly. After checking this, turn the main
power supply on again. If this alarm occurs again,
A303
contact your dealer's customer support.
* This is an error that occurs during the communication
process.
Serial A, B Comm. Check that all serial cables and connectors are
Alarm connected correctly. After checking this, turn the main
power supply on again. If this alarm occurs again,
4 Maintenance
spontaneous output.
338
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Serial A, B Comm. Check that all serial cables and connectors are
Alarm connected correctly. After checking this, turn the main
1 Basic Operations
power supply on again. If this alarm occurs again,
A306
contact your dealer's customer support.
* The transmission capacity was exceeded during
response.
Serial A, B Comm. Check that all serial cables and connectors are
Alarm connected correctly. After checking this, turn the main
power supply on again. If this alarm occurs again,
A307
contact your dealer's customer support.
* This alarm occurs if the flow control is RTS, and CTS
2 Advanced Operations
is inactive.
Barcode Data Error Reading barcode data failed or unregistered barcode
A308
data was read. Check the barcode data.
Barcode Data Error Reading barcode data failed or unregistered barcode
A309
data was read. Check the barcode data.
Serial 2 (A) Comm. Check that the serial 2 (A) connection cables and
Alarm connectors are connected correctly. After checking this,
turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
339
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Serial 3 (B) Comm. Check that the serial 3 (B) connection cables and
Alarm connectors are connected correctly. After checking this,
1 Basic Operations
Serial 2 (A)/3 (B) Check the connection of the KWU2507A. After checking
A332 Connection Error this, turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm
occurs again, contact your dealer's customer support.
Serial Comm. Send The data cannot be sent due to a send buffer overflow.
Error Check that all serial cables and connectors connecting
the KWU2507 and external devices are connected
A333
correctly. After checking this, turn the main power supply
on again. If this alarm occurs again, contact your
3 Installation and Connection
340
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
No USB Memory Free There is no free space for writing data to a file in the
Space USB memory. Increase the free space of the USB
A375
1 Basic Operations
memory by taking measures such as transferring the
data on the USB memory to another location.
USB Memory Access The files are either not in the USB memory, the number
Error of files exceeds the number that can be stored in the
A376
directory, or the file attributes are invalid. Clean up the
data in the USB memory.
USB Memory Output Check USB Memory is not faulty, and make output
A380 buffer full occurs setting again. If this alarm occurs again, call Anritsu or
2 Advanced Operations
its distributor for service
USB Memory Full Transfer data while there is still free space in the USB
A381
memory.
USB Memory Format Check that the USB memory is securely inserted and
Error that it is not faulty. If this alarm occurs again after
A382
checking the above, contact your dealer's customer
support.
No USB Memory The operation stopped because a USB memory is not
A383 Inserted inserted. Insert a USB memory, and then restart the
A405
dealer's customer support.
* The transmission capacity was exceeded during
spontaneous output.
341
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Ethernet Comm. Check that all cables and connectors are connected
Alarm correctly. After checking this, turn the main power supply
1 Basic Operations
established at transmission.
Network Connection Functions such as data recording cannot be performed
Disconnected during production. Check whether the power supplies of
the PC and hub are on, the network cable is connected,
A411
and the network settings are correct. If this alarm occurs
again after checking the above, contact your dealer's
customer support.
NTP Time Sync Error A time lag may have occurred between the main unit
3 Installation and Connection
342
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
An MD Prod. Length Exceeded error has been detected
at the MD head photocell. The products might have
1 Basic Operations
been conveyed too close together. Keep sufficient gaps
between products when conveying them.
Products cannot be inspected correctly immediately
after operation is started or the product is changed. Wait
for a while (noise mask time) before feeding products.
A product might have been fed on the weigh conveyor
without interrupting the MD head photocell. Adjust the
MD head photocell so that the following is observed.
2 Advanced Operations
* If using a custom-made photocell, check the
Can not recognize the
A505 documentation for that product before making
MD product length
adjustments.
▪ When a product is fed;
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): Off
▪ When no product is fed;
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): On
343
Error Messages and Solutions
Error or
Displayed message Details
alarm code
Prod. Eval. Error Products might have been fed through immediately after
the start of operation. Take measures to prevent
1 Basic Operations
supply on again.
Network Connection Check whether the power supplies of the PC and hub
Disconnected are on, the network cable is connected, and the network
A930 settings are correct. If this alarm occurs again after
checking the above, contact your dealer's customer
support.
Data Accum. Start at Data accumulates until reconnection because the
Network Disconnect network is disconnected. Check whether the power
3 Installation and Connection
344
Error Messages and Solutions
■ Handling of the E008, E009, E040, E049, E116
If the weight value displayed on the screen is not "0" even after the [Zero-set]
button is tapped with nothing on the weighcell, perform a weighcell self-check.
A weighcell self-check can also be performed from the error message screens E008,
1 Basic Operations
E009, E040, E049, and E116.
1 From the Menu screen, select "Maint. and Setting", "Unit/connected device set.",
"Weighcell", and then "Weighcell check".
2 Advanced Operations
2 Press the [Execute] button with nothing
on the weighcell, and then follow the
screen instructions.
P. 94 Sensitivity correction
345
Error Messages and Solutions
■ Using the E017 RJ Output Overcurrent Error (When RJ-I/F unit option is
used)
When overcurrent flows at the RJ Output Contact, the circuit protector is actuated and
E017 error is display. Restore status the circuit protector by the following steps.
1 Basic Operations
Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning is turned to the OFF position.
2 Check the connection of rejector, confirm that the load at RJ Output is within the rated
current.
Rectify the causes if any faulty connection or overload at contact point is observed.
status. Q1
RJ-I/F
Button
Q1 Q1
Pushed
Overcurrent Normal
trip status status
4 Maintenance
346
Error Messages and Solutions
■ Handling of the E003, A014
The life of the memory backup battery of this checkweigher is approximately 5 years.
When “E003 Backup Battery Error” or "A014 Backup Battery Alarm" is displayed, the
1 Basic Operations
memory backup battery needs to be replaced. Contact Anritsu promptly for a
replacement.
■ If the checkweigher is operated continually with a low memory backup battery, the memory
may get lost.
■ A graphite fluoride lithium battery is used as a memory backup battery. For replacement,
contact Anritsu.
■ The memory backup battery is a recyclable resource. After use, please return to Anritsu
2 Advanced Operations
representative.
Warning Before removing the battery, make sure to turn the power off.
MPU2010 unit.
X1 Connector
one immediately. Otherwise, the memory may get lost. Battery holder
Battery holder
347
Adjusting Photocell
Adjusting Photocell
The photocell does not need to be adjusted because it is adjusted to the appropriate
position when shipped.
Its response when a product is detected and when it is not detected are as follows:
1 Basic Operations
348
Adjusting Photocell
■ Adjustments When the Photocell Does Not Operate
1 Initialize the photocell.
Press the operation button, and hold it until the stability
indicator lamp (green) starts to blink.
1 Basic Operations
Operation button
Green
⇒ The settings have been initialized. lamp
Orange blinks
lamp
blinks
2 Set the output state of the signal.
Press the operation button 5 times; the orange
operation indicator lamp will start blinking.
Orange
2 Advanced Operations
lamp
Photocell state Setting blinks
349
Adjusting Photocell
■ Advanced Adjustments
For shiny or highly transparent products, or when detection is unstable, make
adjustments based on the characteristics of the products being measured.
1 Basic Operations
Operation button
1 Perform the settings.
(1) Press the operation button, and hold it until the operation Orange lamp
blinks
indicator lamp (orange) starts to blink.
Green lamp
(2) Press the operation button, and hold it until both the operation blinks
indicator lamp (orange) and stability indicator lamp (green) start Orange
lamp blinks
to blink.
2 Advanced Operations
(3) Block the photocell with the products, and press the operation Off
Off
button.
⇒ The operation indicator lamp (orange) and stability indicator lamp (green) turn off.
Confirm that the photocell operates correctly when the product is at the front, center,
and back of the conveyor.
If the operation indicator lamp (orange) is blinking after the adjustment, perform the adjustment
again as the detection is still unstable. If the situation cannot be improved by the adjustment, use
of an area sensor or transparent body sensor (optional) is recommended. Contact Anritsu.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
350
1 Basic Operations 2 Advanced Operations 3 Installation and Connection 4 Maintenance 5 Appendix
351
Memo
5 Appendix
Consumables 353
Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block 384
Specifications 396
352
Consumables
Consumables
■ SSV-h series
1 Basic Operations
Model Product name Product number Remarks
Conveyor belt 84G176741
KWS6003BF3D/5D/6D,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6003BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6203BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G176739B
KWS6203BP3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6003BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6003BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Drive belt 84G880590
KWS6203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R
2 Advanced Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G176741
KWS6005BF3D/5D/6D,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6005BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6205BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G176739D
KWS6205BP3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6005BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6005BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6205BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Drive belt 84G880590
KWS6205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R
353
Consumables
84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K
KWS6411BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS6411BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176740F
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704W
2 Advanced Operations
KWS6412BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G141349S 3K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G141349AS 4K
84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K
KWS6412BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS6412BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176704G
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
354
Consumables
1 Basic Operations
84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K
KWS6414BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS6414BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176740H
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704W
2 Advanced Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G141349AN
KWS6416BF4D/5D/6D,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6416BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6416BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740K
KWS6416BP2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G123908J
KWS6416BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
Drive belt 84G123704W
355
Consumables
84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K
KWS6205BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS6205BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176739D
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G880590
3 Installation and Connection
KWS6206BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS6206BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176739E
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
5 Appendix
356
Consumables
■ SSV-i series
Model Product name Product number Remarks
1 Basic Operations
KWS5265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Conveyor belt
KWS6265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R 84G901127
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5366BW3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt
84G901061R
KWS6366BW3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5366BW2E/3E/5E,
KWS6366BW2E/3E/5E,
KWS5366BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Conveyor belt
KWS6366BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, 84G901127J
(weigh conveyor section)
2 Advanced Operations
KWS5366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G
Conveyor belt 84G901161T 3K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G901161AP 4K
84G901161U 5K
KWS5366BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6366BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K 84G901161AS 7K
84G901161V 8K
Conveyor belt 84G901127J
84G901161U 5K
KWS5472BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6472BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K 84G901161AS 7K
84G901161V 8K
Conveyor belt 84G901127K
(weigh conveyor section)
5 Appendix
357
Consumables
KWS5577BW2E/4E/5E,
KWS5476BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Conveyor belt
KWS5577BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, 84G901127D
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5476BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS5577BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G
Conveyor belt 84G901161Y 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G901161X 6K
84G901161AM 7K
KWS5577BW4K/6K/7K/8K
2 Advanced Operations
84G901161S 8K
Conveyor belt 84G901127D
(weigh conveyor section)
358
Consumables
■ SSV-f series
Model Product name Product number Remarks
Conveyor belt
84G176741
(infeed conveyor section)
1 Basic Operations
KWS5203BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt
84G176739B
KWS5203BP3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
84G123704F
KWS5203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R (infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt
84G880590
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt
84G176741
(infeed conveyor section)
2 Advanced Operations
KWS5205BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt
84G176739D
KWS5205BP3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5205BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
84G123704F
KWS5205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R (infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt
84G880590
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt
84G176741
(infeed conveyor section)
359
Consumables
84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K
KWS5411BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS5411BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176740F
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704W
2 Advanced Operations
KWS5412BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS5412BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176740G
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
360
Consumables
1 Basic Operations
84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K
KWS5414BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS5414BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176740H
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704W
2 Advanced Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt
KWS5416BF4D/5D/6D, 84G141349AN
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5416BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS5416BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt
84G176740K
KWS5416BP2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
KWS5416BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, 84G123908J
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
Drive belt
KWS5416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G 84G123704W
361
Consumables
84H127744M
KWS5524BP2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5524BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt
KWS5524BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, 84G123908J
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5524BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
Drive belt
KWS5524BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G 84G145865S
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G270466K 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 84G270466M 6K
2 Advanced Operations
84G270466N 7K
84G270466P 8K
KWS5524BF4K/6K/7K/8K, Conveyor belt 84H127744M
KWS5524BP4K/6K/7K/8K (weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123908J
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G145865S
(weigh conveyor section)
3 Installation and Connection
Conveyor belt
84G176741H
(infeed conveyor section)
362
Consumables
1 Basic Operations
84G141349AB 5K
84G141349BH 7K
KWS5205BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS5205BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176739D
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G880590
2 Advanced Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt
84G176741H
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5206BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 84G141349AH 8K
KWS5206BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Conveyor belt 84G176739E
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G123704F
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
363
Spare Parts
Spare Parts
■ SSV-h series
Model Product name Product number Remarks
Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
1 Basic Operations
KWS6005BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6005BP3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176807
KWS6006BF3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6006BP3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176785C
KWS6205BF3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6205BP3D/5D/6D, Motor 839H176755C
KWS6206BF3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6206BP3D/5D/6D
Motor 839H176750
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
364
Spare Parts
1 Basic Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
2 Advanced Operations
Motor 839H176755
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H149527F
KWS6416BF4D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6416BP4D/5D/6D, Drive roller 839H176790E
KWS6417BF4D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6417BP4D/5D/6D,
Driven roller 839H149530F
365
Spare Parts
Motor 839H176750
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805F
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6005BF2E/3E/4E, Drive roller 839H228310
KWS6005BP2E/3E/4E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6006BF2E/3E/4E,
Drive roller 839H176780C
KWS6006BP2E/3E/4E,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6205BF2E/3E/4E,
Driven roller 839H228311
3 Installation and Connection
KWS6205BP2E/3E/4E,
KWS6206BF2E/3E/4E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6206BP2E/3E/4E, Driven roller 839H176785C
KWS6005BF2G/3G/4G, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6005BP2G/3G/4G, Motor 839H176755D
KWS6006BF2G/3G/4G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6006BP2G/3G/4G,
Motor 839H176750
KWS6205BF2G/3G/4G,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6205BP2G/3G/4G,
KWS6206BF2G/3G/4G, Tension roller 833H151805F
KWS6206BP2G/3G/4G (infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
366
Spare Parts
1 Basic Operations
KWS6412BP2E/3E/5E,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6414BF2E/3E/5E,
KWS6414BP2E/3E/5E, Driven roller 839H176807
KWS6411BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6411BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176795
KWS6412BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6412BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 839H176755D
KWS6414BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6414BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
2 Advanced Operations
Motor 839H176755
KWS6411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6412BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, Tension roller 833H151805
KWS6412BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6414BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6414BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G
Drive roller 839H279405F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279405E 7K, 8K
Drive roller 839H176790
367
Spare Parts
Motor 839H176750
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176780C
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS6005BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Driven roller 839H176807
3 Installation and Connection
KWS6005BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6006BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6006BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176785C
KWS6205BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 839H176755D
KWS6206BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6206BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R
Motor 839H176750
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
368
Spare Parts
1 Basic Operations
Drive roller 839H176780C
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279406F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279406E 7K, 8K
KWS6205BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6205BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, Driven roller 839H176785C
KWS6206BF3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6206BP3K/4K/5K/7K/8K
Motor 839H176755D
(infeed conveyor section)
2 Advanced Operations
Motor 839H176750
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H627025F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H627025E 7K, 8K
■ SSV-i series
Model Product name Product number Remarks
369
Spare Parts
Motor 839H185610
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H167675C
(infeed conveyor section)
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H185550D
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H185550C
(weigh conveyor section)
3 Installation and Connection
370
Spare Parts
1 Basic Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H185555F
(infeed conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H185555E
KWS5476BW4D/5D/6D
(weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610C
(infeed/weigh conveyor
section)
2 Advanced Operations
Tension roller 839H167675B
(infeed conveyor section)
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H185550F
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H185550E
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H185555F
371
Spare Parts
Motor 839H185610
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H167675E
(infeed conveyor section)
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H279305J
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 84Y185932C
(weigh conveyor section)
3 Installation and Connection
Disk 84Y170100B
5 Appendix
372
Spare Parts
1 Basic Operations
839H279305E 7K
839H279305B 8K
Drive roller 84Y185932C
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279306F 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279306G 5K
839H279306E 7K
839H279306B 8K
2 Advanced Operations
KWS5366BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6366BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Driven roller 839H185545C
(weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610B
(infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H167675H 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section)
373
Spare Parts
839H279305E 7K
839H279305B 8K
Drive roller 839H185550C
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279306F 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279306G 5K
839H279306E 7K
KWS5472BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K, 839H279306B 8K
2 Advanced Operations
839H167675J 7K
839H279330E 8K
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H279305K
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H185550E
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279306C
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5476BW2E/4E/5E,
Driven roller 839H185555E
KWS5476BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
4 Maintenance
374
Spare Parts
1 Basic Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279306C
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5577BW2E/4E/5E,
Driven roller 839H185555E
KWS5577BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5577BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G
Motor 839H185610D
(infeed/weigh conveyor
section)
2 Advanced Operations
Tension roller 839H167675B
(infeed conveyor section)
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H279305F 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279305G 6K
839H279305E 7K
839H279305B 8K
KWS5577BW4K/6K/7K/8K 839H279306B 8K
Driven roller 839H185555E
(weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610D
(infeed/weigh conveyor
4 Maintenance
section)
Tension roller 839H167675H 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279330D 6K
839H167675J 7K
839H279330E 8K
Disk 84Y170100B
5 Appendix
375
Spare Parts
Motor 839H185610
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H167675C
(infeed conveyor section)
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H279305F 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279305G 5K
839H279305E 7K
3 Installation and Connection
839H279305B 8K
Drive roller 84Y185932
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279306F 3K, 4K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279306G 5K
839H279306E 7K
839H279306B 8K
KWS5265BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K,
KWS6265BW3K/4K/5K/7K/8K Driven roller 839H168530
(weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610B
4 Maintenance
376
Spare Parts
■ SSV-f series
Model Product name Product number Remarks
Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
1 Basic Operations
Drive roller 839H176780B
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H176807
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5203BF3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176785B
KWS5203BP3D/5D/6D (weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H176755C
2 Advanced Operations
(infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H176750B
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176780D
(weigh conveyor section)
377
Spare Parts
Motor 839H176755B
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H149527F
KWS5416BF4D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5416BP4D/5D/6D, Drive roller 839H176790F
KWS5417BF4D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5417BP4D/5D/6D,
Driven roller 839H149530F
3 Installation and Connection
KWS5416BF2E/4E/5E,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5416BP2E/4E/5E,
KWS5417BF2E/4E/5E, Driven roller 839H176795F
KWS5417BP2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 83G901478
KWS5416BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5417BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Motor 839H176755B
KWS5417BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS5416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, Tension roller 839H167733B
KWS5417BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5417BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G Gear head 83G901129
4 Maintenance
378
Spare Parts
1 Basic Operations
KWS5522BP4D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5524BF4D/5D/6D,
Driven roller 839H149530F
KWS5524BP4D/5D/6D,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5522BF2E/4E/5E,
KWS5522BP2E/4E/5E, Driven roller 839H185885
KWS5524BF2E/4E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5524BP2E/4E/5E, Motor 83G901478
KWS5522BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5522BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
2 Advanced Operations
Motor 83G176769
KWS5524BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5524BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Tension roller 839H167733B
KWS5522BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5522BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS5524BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, Gear head 83G901129C
KWS5524BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G (infeed conveyor section)
Gear head 83G176770
(weigh conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H228310
379
Spare Parts
Motor 839H176750B
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805F
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5411BF2E/3E/5E, Drive roller 839H176806
KWS5411BP2E/3E/5E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5412BF2E/3E/5E,
Drive roller 839H176790B
KWS5412BP2E/3E/5E,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5414BF2E/3E/5E,
Driven roller 839H176807
3 Installation and Connection
KWS5414BP2E/3E/5E,
KWS5411BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5411BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176795B
KWS5412BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5412BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 839H176755D
KWS5414BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5414BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
Motor 839H176755B
KWS5411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS5412BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, Tension roller 833H151805
KWS5412BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5414BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
4 Maintenance
KWS5414BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G
5 Appendix
380
Spare Parts
1 Basic Operations
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H176807
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS5203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176785B
KWS5203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R (weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H176755D
(infeed conveyor section)
2 Advanced Operations
Motor 839H176750B
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 833H151805
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176806
(infeed conveyor section)
Drive roller 839H176780D
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H176807
381
Spare Parts
Motor 839H176750B
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H627025F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H627025E 7K, 8K
Drive roller 839H279405F 3K, 4K, 5K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279405E 7K, 8K
Drive roller 839H176790B
(weigh conveyor section)
3 Installation and Connection
839H627025E 7K, 8K
5 Appendix
382
Spare Parts
1 Basic Operations
Drive roller 839H185880
(weigh conveyor section)
Driven roller 839H279406F 4K, 6K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H279406E 7K, 8K
Driven roller 839H185885
(weigh conveyor section)
KWS5524BF4K/6K/7K/8K, Motor 83G901478
KWS5524BP4K/6K/7K/8K (infeed conveyor section)
2 Advanced Operations
Motor 83G176769
(weigh conveyor section)
Tension roller 839H627025F 4K, 6K
(infeed conveyor section) 839H627025E 7K, 8K
Gear head 83G901129C
(infeed conveyor section)
Gear head 83G176770
(weigh conveyor section)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
383
Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block
Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block
When connecting the checkweigher to an external device or rejector, connect the cables
to the terminal block connector and push-type terminal block as described below.
it is secure.
Terminal block
1 Press the tip of the square button of the
terminal block with the tip of a tool.
Square button
3 Remove the tip of the tool from the square (for tool) Round hole
button. (for cable)
*
When the cable cannot be inserted, press the AC power cable
square button firmly with a tool. for rejector
5 Appendix
384
External I/O Specifications
External I/O Specifications
1. I/O Points
The checkweigher can use external I/O control.
Standard + KCU2504A expansion I/O
Standard
(optional)
1 Basic Operations
Input
2 10
terminal
Output
2 10
terminal
2. I/O Specifications
Applicable Terminal block connector (Phoenix Contact MSTBT 2,
2 Advanced Operations
connector 5/8-ST-5, 08)
Conductor cross-sectional area of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
Applicable (AWG24 to 12)
cable Remove 7 mm of the cable covering material when
connecting to the terminal block connector.
For the procedure to connect to the X53 (terminal block connector), refer to "Connecting
the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block".
1 1
Output terminal
V63 2 2 OUT1 Relay contact ratings
3 3 250 Vac, 1A max.
30 Vdc, 1A max.
V64 4 4 OUT2
+24 V
V65
6 6
IN1
Input terminal
Use a contact with rated
V66 voltage of 30 Vdc and
7 7
IN2 a rated load of 5 mA or
8 8 more.
IN-COMMON
G(S)
For the input part, using in the fail safe
side is recommended so that breaks can
5 Appendix
be detected.
385
External I/O Specifications
2. Usage range V1
Voltage: V1 DC 5 to 30 V
Current: I1 0.01 to 1 A
■ Input (IN1/IN2)
1. Reference circuit
Relay contact
X53
Photocoupler
+24 V
5 mA Input switch
IN1 6
4 Maintenance
5 mA Input switch
IN2 7
G (S)
Wiring must be 30 m or less
MPU2010 UNIT
5 Appendix
386
External I/O Specifications
X53
4.7 K
1 Basic Operations
Internal circuit
+24 V
5 mA
6 or 7 NPN transistor
2 Advanced Operations
NPN transistor output photocell (three-wire) connection
387
External I/O Specifications
+24 V
EMEG.SW
2 Advanced Operations
X29
1
For emergency stop; normally short-circuited.
Internal 2 Cannot be used when CE marking is supported.
circuit
When used as emergency stop input, use 1b contact, a
contact rating of 30 VDC or more, and rated load of 0.1 A
3 or more.
Cannot be used when an emergency stop switch is
3 Installation and Connection
Checkweigher
MPU2010 unit
+24 V
EMEG.SW
X29
Internal 2
circuit
5 Appendix
388
RJ Output Specification
RJ Output Specification
■ Output Specifications
1 Basic Operations
Applicable Hirose Electric DF1B-20DS-2.5RC
connector (not provided with this checkweigher)
MPU2010 UNIT
RJ X45
RJ output
FET 3
V58 RJ1
4
V59 RJ2 FET contact rating
30 VDC,1 A or less
2 Advanced Operations
5
V61 RJ4
6
V62 RJ5
For Anritsu rejectors.
G(S)
Do not use for other
Photocoupler +5 V
7 purposes.
MOTOR ON Photocoupler
Emergency stop
contact rating
l 1
G(+24 V) +24 V
24 VC OUT
2
G(S)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
389
RJ-I/F Unit (Optional) RJ I/O Specifications
RJ-I/F Unit (Optional) RJ I/O Specifications
It is used to connect to an Anritsu rejector with a 100 VAC interface or a rejector of another
manufacturer.
■ Output Specifications
1 Basic Operations
UNIT
REJECTOR X2
RJ X45 X1 TO MPU
1 FG
1 1 Rejector output
Photo MOS relay
2 2 3 RJ1
V2 Photo MOS Relay
Contact
4 RJ5 110 Vac, 0.7 A max.
V3
30 Vdc, 0.7 A max.
3 Installation and Connection
6
Relay Contact Rating
7 MOTOR ON 110 Vac, 2.5 A max.
8 30 Vdc, 2.5 A max.
19 19
Emergency stop relay
4 Maintenance
20 20 9
+24V Only for Anritsu rejector
10 DO NOT use for other
11 purposes.
G(S)
5 Appendix
390
RJ-I/F Unit (Optional) RJ I/O Specifications
RJ-I/F unit
1 Basic Operations
K4
K5
REJECTOR
X2
2 Advanced Operations
■ Rejector output (RJ1 to RJ5)
1. Reference circuit
Photo MOS Relay I1
2. Usage range
Voltage: V1 AC110 V
V1
Current: I1 0.7 A (peak 1 A)
Load
3. Precautions
Checkweigher 1 kΩ 0.1 μF
Install the CR for surge absorber.
■ Mot. ON Output
1. Reference circuit
2. Usage range I1
Voltage: V1 AC110 V
Current: I1 2.5 A 120 Ω Leak current
V1 IL is 5 mA or
0.1 μF
Leak current: IL 5 mA Load less 4 Maintenance
391
RJ-I/F Unit (Optional) RJ I/O Specifications
Voltage: V1 DC30 V I1 V1
Current: I1 0.7 A (peak 1 A)
3. Precautions Checkweigher
Install the diode for surge absorber.
■ Mot. ON Output
2 Advanced Operations
1. Reference circuit
2. Usage range Load
120 Ω
Voltage: V1 DC30 V I1 V1
0.1 μF
Current: I1 2.5 A
3. Precautions Checkweigher
Install the diode for surge absorber.
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
392
Ethernet Connection
Ethernet Connection
The standard specifications for this checkweigher include Ethernet (LAN) connection to
QUICCA.
■ Communication Specifications
1 Basic Operations
Item Description
10BASE-T (IEEE 802.3)
Applicable standard
100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3u)
10 Mbps/100 Mbps auto switching
Bit rate
(100 Mbps preferred)
Communication method Full duplex
Manchester code (10BASE-T)
2 Advanced Operations
Coding method
4B5B/MLT-3 (100BASE-TX)
Access method CSMA/CD
Applicable protocol TCP, IP, ICMP, ARP, RARP
Connector shape RJ-45 (8P8C)
Pin number Signal name Name
1 TXD+ Transmitted data (+)
2 TXD- Transmitted data ()
SPD
V36 (Speed ON (orange): 100 Mbps
LED) OFF: 10 Mbps
393
Ethernet Connection
■ Text Specifications
CD-ROM : Click on the link below to see.
Text Specifications
Booklet : You are liable for cost. Please contact Anritsu or its distributor for service.
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
394
Timing Chart
Timing Chart
Weight signal
1 Basic Operations
Detection signal
(Photocell)
T1 30~6500 ms
(Measurement delay)
10ms
Photocell-off delay
2 Advanced Operations
T8
10~12500 ms
(Dbl. Prod Timer)
Evaluation time
20 ms
T3 1~9999 ms
(Rejectingdelay)
Auto zero-setting
operation
T5
(Auto zero-setting 0~60000 ms
prohibition)
4 Maintenance
MIN 50 ms MIN 50 ms
External NG input
(EXNG/EXNG2)
Evaluation output
(external IO control output) 0~9999 ms
5 Appendix
395
Specifications
Specifications
■ SSV-h series
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
396
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
397
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
398
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
399
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
400
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
401
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
402
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
403
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
404
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
405
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
406
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
407
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
408
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
409
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
410
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
411
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
412
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
413
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
414
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
415
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
416
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
417
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
418
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
419
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
420
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
421
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
422
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
423
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
424
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
425
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
426
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
427
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
428
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
429
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
430
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
431
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
432
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
433
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:119 kg 4K:120 kg 5K:121 kg 7K:123 kg 8K:124 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
434
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
435
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
436
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
437
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
438
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
439
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
440
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
441
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
442
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
443
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
444
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
445
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
446
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
447
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
448
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
449
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Height H 5 to 280 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:123 kg 4K:124 kg 5K:125 kg 7K:127 kg 8K:128 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
450
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
451
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
452
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
453
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
454
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
455
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
456
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
457
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Height H 5 to 280 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:124 kg 4K:125 kg 5K:126 kg 7K:128 kg 8K:129 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
458
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
459
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
460
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
461
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
462
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
463
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
464
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
465
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
466
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
467
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
468
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
469
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
470
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
471
Specifications
■ SSV-i series
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Fe
Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 4E: φ0.4 mm
sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 106 kg 5D: 108 kg 6D: 109 kg 2E: 116 kg 3E: 116 kg 4E: 117 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
472
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
473
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
474
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
475
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:116 kg 3G:116 kg 4G:117 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
476
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
477
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Height H 5 to 275 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:127 kg 4K:128 kg 5K:129 kg 7K:131 kg 8K:132 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
478
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
479
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
480
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
481
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
482
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
483
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 5G: φ0.8 mm 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:121 kg 3G:121 kg 4G:122 kg 5G:123 kg 7G:125 kg 8G:126 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
484
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
485
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Height H 5 to 275 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:128 kg 4K:129 kg 5K:130 kg 7K:132 kg 8K:133 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
486
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
487
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
488
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
489
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
490
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
491
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 5G: φ0.8 mm 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G:122 kg 3G:122 kg 4G:123 kg 5G:124 kg 7G:126 kg 8G:127 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
492
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
493
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:129 kg 4K:130 kg 5K:131 kg 7K:133 kg 8K:134 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
494
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
495
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
496
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
497
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
498
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
499
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 115kg 3G: 115 kg 4G: 116 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
500
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
501
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Height H 5 to 275 mm
Belt speed 9 to 82 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:126 kg 4K:127 kg 5K:128 kg 7K:130 kg 8K:131 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
502
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
503
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
504
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
505
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
506
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
507
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
508
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
509
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:127 kg 4K:128 kg 5K:129 kg 7K:131 kg 8K:132 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
510
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
511
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
512
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
513
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
514
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
515
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 5G: φ0.8 mm 7G: φ0.85 mm 7G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 121 kg 3G: 121 kg 4G: 122 kg 5G: 123 kg 7G: 125 kg 8G: 126 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
516
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
517
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:128 kg 4K:129 kg 5K:130 kg 7K:132 kg 8K:133 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
518
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
519
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
520
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
521
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
522
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
523
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.75 mm 4G: φ0.85 mm 6G: φ0.9 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 153 kg 4G: 155 kg 6G: 159 kg 7G: 161 kg 8G: 163 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
524
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
525
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
526
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
527
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
528
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
529
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.75 mm 4G: φ0.85 mm 6G: φ0.9 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 153 kg 4G: 155 kg 6G: 159 kg 7G: 161 kg 8G: 163 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
530
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
531
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
sensitivity*3 SUS304 4K: φ0.85 mm 6K: φ0.9 mm 7K: φ0.9 mm 8K: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 4K:162 kg 6K:166 kg 7K:168 kg 8K:170 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP66 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
532
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
533
Specifications
■ SSV-f series
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
534
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
535
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
536
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape).Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
537
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 108 kg 3G: 108 kg 4G: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
538
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
539
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
540
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
541
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
542
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
543
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 108 kg 3G: 108 kg 4G: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
544
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
545
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Height H 5 to 280 mm
Belt speed 15 to 103 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:119 kg 4K:120 kg 5K:121 kg 7K:123 kg 8K:124 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
546
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
547
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
548
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
549
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
550
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
551
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 2G: 108 kg 3G: 108 kg 4G: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
552
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
553
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Height H 5 to 280 mm
Belt speed 15 to 120 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:119 kg 4K:120 kg 5K:121 kg 7K:123 kg 8K:124 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
554
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
555
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
556
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
557
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
558
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
559
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
560
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
561
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Height H 5 to 280 mm
Belt speed 15 to 94 m/min
Detection Fe 3K: φ0.35 mm 4K: φ0.4 mm 5K: φ0.45 mm 7K: φ0.45 mm 8K: φ0.5 mm
sensitivity*3 SUS304 3K: φ0.7 mm 4K: φ0.8 mm 5K: φ0.8 mm 7K: φ0.85 mm 8K: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3K:121 kg 4K:122 kg 5K:123 kg 7K:125 kg 8K:126 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
562
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
563
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
564
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
565
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
566
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
567
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
568
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
569
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
570
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
571
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
572
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
573
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
574
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
575
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
576
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
577
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
578
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
579
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
580
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
581
Specifications
KWS5416BF R H
KWS5416BP R 50 KWS5416B 2R
100 KWS5416B 3R
345 Belt width
130 KWS5416B 4R
820
1 Basic Operations
350
150 KWS5416B 5R
180 KWS5416B 6R
1205
Tower Light (Option)
Printer
(Option)
185
300 153
Indicator
236
Metal Detector
400
Flow direction
670
900
Roller
25 dia.
1370 to 1520
Roller
H
Line heights
700 to 850
2 Advanced Operations
405
M20
Leg spacing
60 dia. 645 50
685
280 820 105
Leg spacing
Units: mm
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
582
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
583
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
584
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
585
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
586
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
587
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
588
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
589
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
590
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
591
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
592
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
593
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
594
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
595
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
596
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
597
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
598
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
599
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
600
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
601
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
602
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
603
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
2 Advanced Operations
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 300 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 4K:161 kg 6K:165 kg 7K:167 kg 8K:169 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
5 Appendix
604
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
2 Advanced Operations
3 Installation and Connection
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
605
Copyright, etc.
Copyright, etc.
606
CE Conformity Marking
CE Conformity Marking
CE Conformity Marking
The CE conformity marking is affixed to Anritsu products to indicate that they conform to
the MD, LVD, and EMC directives of the European Union (EU).
1 Basic Operations
CE marking
Check the following to see whether your equipment meets the Council Directive or not.
- The CE conformity marking on the product
- Attached ‘CE Declaration of Conformity’
2 Advanced Operations
The following directives are applied:
Directive 2006/42/EC Machinery Directive (MD)
Directive 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive (LVD)
Directive 2004/108/EC EMC Directive (EMC)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
607
Document No.:
84W246053-14
April 2021 15th Edition
Inner Pages Printed on Recycled Paper.
Printed in Japan
Operation Manual Checkweigher SSV Series B Type with Metal Detector